JP7248408B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing games.

As a gaming machine, game balls, which are game media, are shot into a game area by a shooting device, and when the game balls enter a prize winning area such as a prize winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player.

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some of such gaming machines are configured to be controllable to a special state, which is a state different from the advantageous state. For example, as shown in Patent Document 1, it is possible to perform a small winning game in which a large winning opening is opened in a predetermined pattern, and a game in which the determination result of whether or not to perform a small winning game is notified by a performance symbol. machine is proposed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33787 (Fig. 18)

As for the game machine which can be controlled to a special state as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games in a game machine capable of being controlled to a special state.

The game machine of means 1 is
perform variable display,
a game area in which a game medium is shot;
a game state control means for controlling a game state;
production control means for controlling production;
A gaming machine comprising image display means,
The variable display includes a first variable display and a second variable display,
The game area includes a first game area and a second game area,
The game state control means comprises a normal state, an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a game state controlled after the advantageous state ends, in which the game value increases according to the special state. A special state that is likely to be granted and a predetermined state that is a game state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state and is different from the special state,
In the normal state, shooting game media to the first game area is more advantageous than shooting game media to the second game area,
In the predetermined state and the special state, shooting the game medium to the second game area has a higher advantage than shooting the game medium to the first game area,
the special state is a state in which, of the first variable display and the second variable display, the execution frequency of the second variable display is higher than that in the normal state;
The production control means is
A common background image can be displayed on the image display means when being controlled to the special state and when being controlled to the predetermined state,
When being controlled to the special state, a special display corresponding to the special state can be displayed on the image display means;
The special display can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with a pending display area in which the pending display indicating the number of pending executions of the second variable display is displayed,
The game state control means controls the game state to one of a plurality of game states including the special state and the predetermined state according to the type of the advantageous state ,
The production control means is
In the special state, it is possible to control to any one of a plurality of production modes,
In the special state, the special display can be displayed regardless of the production mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
The gaming machine of means C1 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) comprising a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling an effect,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to a player, a special state (small win game state) different from the advantageous state, and a game state controlled after the end of the advantageous state, wherein the game value is determined by the special state. can be controlled into a special state (high probability/second KT state) in which is likely to be given, and a predetermined state (high probability/first KT state) which is a game state controlled after the end of the advantageous state and is different from the special state. and
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Common predetermined display ("cloudy background image") when being controlled to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) and when being controlled to the predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT state) image", "rain image", and "typhoon image") can be displayed,
It is characterized by being able to display a special display corresponding to the special state (special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH") when being controlled to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state). game machine.
The predetermined display can be shared between the special state and the predetermined state, and the special display can be used to identify the special state and the predetermined display, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Controllable to one of multiple types of production modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode),
When it is controlled to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) and when it is controlled to the predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT state), it is possible to control to a common production mode (Fig. As shown in 11-2, even when it is controlled to any game state of high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) and high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), as a common production mode It is possible to control the cloudy mode, and rain as a common production mode even when it is controlled to any game state of high accuracy / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) Mode can be controlled, and even when it is controlled to any game state of high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), typhoon mode as a common production mode controllable to
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to the special state and when it is controlled to the predetermined state, it is possible to control to a common production mode, and the material of the production mode is common regardless of the game state It is possible to reduce the development cost.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The gaming state control means (CPU 103)
Depending on the type of advantageous state (6R probability variable big hit, 10R probability variable big hit, 2R probability variable big hit), the game state is controlled to either the special state or the predetermined state (as shown in FIG. 10-29, [ When 10R probability variable big hit] or [2R probability variable big win] occurs, after the big win game ends, it shifts to high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and when [6R probability variable big win] occurs , After the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state))
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the game state is controlled to be either a special state or a predetermined state according to the type of advantageous state, the player is made to pay attention to the type of the advantageous state, and the interest of the presentation related to the advantageous state is made. can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
When it is controlled to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) and when it is controlled to the predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT state), the action of the player (the push button 31B is pressed by the player) 11-9 and 11-11, the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 can be controlled based on the operation). The [cloudy mode] indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed in the image display device 5 is switched to the [typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 Since the [typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 in , is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), the production mode is selected from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode). It has been changed to the production mode (typhoon mode) shown in icon 18TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when it is controlled in a special state and when it is controlled in a predetermined state, it is possible to change the production mode based on the action of the player, and it is possible to change the production mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
One of a plurality of types of presentation modes based on the player's action (the player's operation of the push button 31B) when being controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state). (B1) to (B3) in the jackpot ending period production mode selection period (period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), after the end of the jackpot game state It is possible to select from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode as the production mode to be controlled),
The special display can be displayed when being controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), during the production mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, the typhoon mode image on the image display device 5 Special display 18TM100 showing the letters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed on the upper right and lower left of 18TM200C)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify that the special state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not the special state is controlled (possible to execute a RUSH suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit is)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when selecting the production mode.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6,
The game state control means (CPU 103) performs variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. is executable and
The production control means (production control CPU 120), in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), variable display of the first specific identification information controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) (first special symbol It is possible to execute a specific corresponding effect (jackpot countdown effect) corresponding to the variable display of
A gaming machine characterized in that the form of the specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game related to the specific correspondence effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) comprising a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling an effect,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to the player, a special state (small win game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (high accuracy/second KT state) in which game value is likely to be given due to the special state. and is controllable to
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
Based on the player's action (the player's operation of the push button 31B) in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), multiple types of production modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) It is controllable to one of the production modes,
Depending on the effect mode, it is possible to vary the predetermined effect corresponding to the control of the special state (as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode is, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small win", the special symbol 18TM050 (a small winning symbol in which the letters "OPEN" are shown in the oval object) is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the production mode is the rain mode, when the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is "small win", the symbol The display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R have a combination of decorative patterns ("135" in this example) that are in order of odd-numbered patterns, and are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIGS. , when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, when the result of the variation display of the second special symbol is "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a note-shaped image) is fixed and stopped for the combination of decorative patterns displayed superimposed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the performance mode can be selected by the action of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Equipped with variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (variable display),
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) is capable of variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the variable display mode of the decoration identification information according to the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), the effect mode is In the case of the cloudy mode, the number patterns (in this example, "0" to "9") and the special pattern 18TM050 (a small winning pattern in which the letters "OPEN" are shown in an oval object) are used as decoration patterns. , and as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B2) and 11-5 (C2), when the production mode is the rain mode or the typhoon mode, a number pattern (in this example , "0" to "9"))
A gaming machine characterized by:
It is possible to change the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information according to the presentation mode, and to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
Variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of executing variable display (decoration pattern variable display, small pattern variable display) is provided,
The variable display means (effect control CPU 120) provides variable display of the first decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) and variable display of the second decoration identification information whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information (small display). fluctuation display of the pattern) and can be executed,
The aspect of variable display of the second decoration identification information is common regardless of the production mode (as shown in FIG. , and the areas where the second small symbols are displayed are the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 regardless of the production mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the aspect of variable display of the second decoration identification information can be made common regardless of the performance mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even when the performance mode is switched. becomes possible.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3,
Variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols);
A pending display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of pending displays (number of first pending memories, number of second pending memories) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable displays of special symbols) that have not been executed. prepared,
The mode of the number of pending displays is common regardless of the production mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first reserved memory number and the display mode of the second reserved memory number can be , and the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which production mode is controlled)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the mode of the number of pending displays can be made common regardless of the performance mode, the player can accurately grasp the number of pending displays even when the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4,
Provided with variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is during the variable display (during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed) to the action of the player (that the push button 31B is operated by the player) Based on this, it is possible to change the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 At the timing when the current [cloudy mode] is switched to [typhoon mode] and the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [typhoon mode ] is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), the production mode is changed from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode) to the production mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300. has been changed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the player's action during the variable display, and the interest in the game with respect to the effect mode can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can change the production mode based on the player's action (the player's operation of the push button 31B) in the advantageous state (jackpot game state). (As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the production mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode can be selected)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the performance mode can be selected by the action of the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the production mode (when the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode, the display shown in FIG. 11-11 As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), high A special display 18TM100 showing the characters “RUSH” corresponding to the positive/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed, the production mode is changed, and the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. If it is, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the image display device 5 In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, a special display 18TM100 showing the letters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to specify that the game is in the special state regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a game value display corresponding to the given game value regardless of the effect mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5 , regardless of which production mode is being controlled, the display of the number of consecutive small winning balls is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the display mode and display area of the game value display can be shared in each performance mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the game value display even when the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means A9 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8,
A variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel prepared,
The production control means (production control CPU 120), in the special state (high probability / second KT state), variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) (of the first special symbol It is possible to execute a specific corresponding effect (jackpot countdown effect) corresponding to variable display),
A gaming machine characterized in that the form of the specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game related to the specific correspondence effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A game machine (pachinko game machine 1) comprising a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling an effect,
The game state control means (CPU 103)
An advantageous state (big win game state) advantageous to the player, a special state (small win game state) different from the advantageous state, and a special state (high accuracy/second KT state) in which game value is likely to be given due to the special state. and is controllable to
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a corresponding effect (variable display of decorative patterns) corresponding to variable display (variable display of special patterns),
Based on the player's action (the player's operation of the push button 31B) in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), a plurality of types of production modes (symbol display area 5L) with different corresponding production modes , 5C, and 5R, variations between number patterns (“0” to “9” in this example) and special patterns 18TM050 (a small winning pattern in which the characters “OPEN” are shown in an oval object) as decoration patterns Cloudy mode where display is performed, rain mode and typhoon mode where variable display of numerical patterns (in this example, "0" to "9") is performed as decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) Controllable to any production mode,
When changing the production mode, it is possible to execute a special production that reduces the visibility of the corresponding production (as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when changing the production mode, the production mode change production By superimposing and displaying the mode change image 18TM310 showing the characters "mode CHANGE" on the whole screen of the image display device 5, the variation of the decorative pattern with different display modes before and after the change of the performance mode. lowering the visibility of the display)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player from being confused due to different modes of corresponding effects when changing to the effect mode.

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
As the corresponding effect, variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) can be executed,
Depending on the production mode, the form of variable display of the decoration identification information differs (when the production mode is the cloudy mode, the number patterns (in this example, "0 ” to “9”) and a special pattern 18TM050 (a small winning pattern in which the letters “OPEN” are shown in an oval object) are displayed, and if the production mode is rain mode or typhoon mode, , in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variable display of number patterns (“0” to “9” in this example) is performed as decorative patterns.)
A gaming machine characterized by:

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) is
As the corresponding effects, variable display of the first decoration identification information (variation display of the decorative pattern) and variable display of the second decoration identification information (variation display of the small pattern) whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information are performed. is executable and
The aspect of variable display of the second decoration identification information is common regardless of the production mode (as shown in FIG. , and the areas where the second small symbols are displayed are the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 regardless of the production mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the aspect of variable display of the second decoration identification information can be made common regardless of the performance mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even when the performance mode is switched. becomes possible.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3,
A pending display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of pending displays (first pending memory number, second pending memory number) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable displays) that are not executed,
The mode of the number of pending displays is common regardless of the production mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first reserved memory number and the display mode of the second reserved memory number can be , and the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which production mode is controlled)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, since the mode of the number of pending displays can be made common regardless of the performance mode, the player can accurately grasp the number of pending displays even when the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B4,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is during the variable display (during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed) to the action of the player (that the push button 31B is operated by the player) Based on this, it is possible to change the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 At the timing when the current [cloudy mode] is switched to [typhoon mode] and the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [typhoon mode ] is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), the production mode is changed from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode) to the production mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300. has been changed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the player's action during the variable display, and the interest in the game with respect to the effect mode can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can change the production mode based on the player's action (the player's operation of the push button 31B) in the advantageous state (jackpot game state). (As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the production mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode can be selected)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the performance mode can be selected by the action of the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The production control means (production control CPU 120) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the production mode (when the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode, the display shown in FIG. 11-11 As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), high A special display 18TM100 showing the characters “RUSH” corresponding to the positive/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed, the production mode is changed, and the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. If it is, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the image display device 5 In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, a special display 18TM100 showing the letters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, it is possible to specify that the game is in the special state regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The gaming machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a game value display corresponding to the given game value regardless of the effect mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5 , regardless of which production mode is being controlled, the display of the number of consecutive small winning balls is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode)
A gaming machine characterized by:
According to such a configuration, the display mode and display area of the game value display can be shared in each performance mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the game value display even when the performance mode is switched. .

The gaming machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
The game state control means is capable of simultaneously executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol). can be,
The production control means (production control CPU 120), in the special state (high probability / second KT state), variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) (of the first special symbol It is possible to execute a specific corresponding effect (jackpot countdown effect) corresponding to variable display),
A gaming machine characterized in that the form of the specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
According to such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game related to the specific correspondence effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

For example, in JP-A-2018-033787 (paragraph 0040,0088), it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and it is determined that it is almost a small hit in the second special symbol determination, and the probability variation It is described that when a player hits right in a game state, a small winning game is repeatedly performed. Further, there is a configuration in which any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player can be set. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraphs 0069, 0085, 0090, FIG. 12), display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is performed in a predetermined manner. It is stated to be executed in time. By combining the gaming machines described in JP-A-2018-033787 and JP-A-2010-200902, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects in a game configured to be controllable to a special state. However, simply executing the setting suggestion effect in a game configured to be controllable to a special state cannot sufficiently improve the interest in the game. Therefore, an object of the invention relating to the means D1 to D7 is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggesting effect.

(Means D1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player is set. Advantageous state control means (for example, steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100) which is a gaming machine that can be set to a value and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player part), and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a special state (for example, a small game state) that is different from the advantageous state , Special state control means (for example, step 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213 in the game control microcomputer 100 that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which game value is easily given due to the special state ), and in response to the passing of a game medium (e.g., a game ball) through a specific area (e.g., a special winning port), a setting suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize) can be executed. It is characterized by having an execution means (for example, a part that executes 052IWS323 and S324 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means D2) In means D1, the advantageous state control means can control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The special state control means controls to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit, the determination value for determining the small hit) (For example, steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), and the determination value is for determining to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for big hit judgment) and a special judgment value for determining to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) Setting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 Steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 are executed in step S21TM4530 to S21TM4620), and the number of special determination values may be common regardless of the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or D2, the setting suggestion effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, high probability/small hit during the second KT state). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the special winning hole, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small hit or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, when the control is in the advantageous state or in the special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning Variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) between an easy-to-enter state (e.g., open state) in which game media (e.g., game balls) can easily enter and a non-easy-to-enter state (e.g., closed state) in which entry is difficult or impossible. Control means (for example, a part that executes steps S122 to S124, S126, and S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state. (For example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is in an open state and a game ball enters the big winning hole or the special winning hole. Based on this, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small hit or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means D5) In any one of means D1 to D4, the setting suggestion effect executing means, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the jackpot game, from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state)), it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, change the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display in step 052 IWS 624). may be According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of control of the game state.

(Means D6) In any one of means D1 to D5, the setting suggestion effect execution means controls the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed during the special state, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666). Depending on the arrival of the number of prize balls display suggestion effects A to F at different selection ratios Or, for example, the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / 2nd KT state, or the high probability / 2nd KT state According to the number of execution times of the variable display executed during the game, the number-of-balls display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times the special state is controlled, the total game value, or the number of times the variable display is executed.

(Means D7) In any one of the means D1 to D6, the special state control means sets an advantageous special state (for example, a second KT state) as a special state and a disadvantageous state for the player compared to the advantageous special state. and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state). It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with a different selection ratio depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball wins in the special winning hole as a small hit during the second KT state, the suggestion at the time of winning a small win It is possible to execute an effect and a display suggestion effect for the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the character object control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing the effect modes of the setting suggesting effect, and (4) is an explanatory view showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggesting effect. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting changing flag is set when power is turned on; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing; (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted before setting values are determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control in the case where power is interrupted after setting values are determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the characteristic part 052IW. FIG. 11 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characterizing portion 052IW; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big-hit probability and small-hit probability for every setting value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the release pattern of the variable winning ball device and the special variable winning ball device in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design normal process. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special design stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the role product control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during big-hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the game state. It is a flow chart which shows an example of design process processing normally. It is a flowchart which shows normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal design stop processing. It is a flow chart showing normal electric accessary product opening pre-processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flowchart which shows a suggestion production|presentation process at the time of over winning a prize. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining an over-winning suggestive effect; It is a flow chart which shows suggestion production processing at the time of small hit winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a suggestion production|presentation determination table at the time of small-hit winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows number-of-balls display suggestion production processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table; It is a flow chart which shows prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number of prize balls emphasis effect determination table. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display start waiting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of a setting value suggestion effect; It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production|presentation. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of hitting to the right information. It is an explanatory view for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small win suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. It is an explanatory view for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small win suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the third modification. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation process in the fourth modification. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a low probability state; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of pending display and active display in a high-probability state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the cloudy mode; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the rain mode; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding various effects in the typhoon mode; It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the jackpot game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production|presentation aspect regarding various production|presentations in a jackpot game state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the high accuracy/first KT state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the high accuracy/first KT state; It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the high accuracy/second KT state. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode related to various effects in the high accuracy/second KT state;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

In addition, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation in which a shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. there is The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and lighting is controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area is provided for displaying pending display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is being suspended. In this example, the first reserved display area 5A for displaying the reserved display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second reserved display for displaying the reserved indication corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed informing LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. Note that the LED 37 for hitting to the right is controlled to light up by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning hole is provided. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When game balls are detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

In addition, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first starting winning opening, and is configured so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. It is In this way, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the entry of the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area, the game ball can be shot toward the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed hitting). operation), the game ball can win in the first start winning hole.

In addition, in this example, only when left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row 19 of nails, the game ball is configured to be able to win in the first start winning hole, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the first starting winning opening on the left side of the game area, or the first starting winning opening A hole may be provided on the left side of the game area and a line of nails 19 may be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting prize hole only when left-handed operation is performed.

A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 .

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and is formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow down. A large winning opening positioned below the member is changed into an open state (also called an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also called a closed state) in which a game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in a jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved toward, and the opening control is executed to open the big winning opening serving as the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning hole for a small hit and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning hole are provided. 2, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged so as to be adjacent to it on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which game balls flow down is extended in the front-rear direction. By moving back and forth, the special winning port located below the bottom member and the second start winning port can be opened (also called an open state) in which game balls can win and a closed state (also called closed state) in which game balls cannot win. change to The special variable winning ball device 17 is a bottom member in a small winning game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small winning symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, and the opening control is executed to open the special prize winning opening serving as the prize winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is forwardly moved when the symbol is drawn out and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20, The opening control is executed to open the second start winning opening which is the winning area.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B therebelow.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in an open state, the game ball falling into the second starting winning opening enters the special variable winning opening. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17 . On the other hand, if the second starting winning hole is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. - 特許庁At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning hole, the game ball enters the special winning hole. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in an open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Also, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom member. there is In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with regulation pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right direction or from the upper right to the lower left direction. The flowing direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the motion of the forward/backward direction component, and the time required for the flowing down is delayed as compared with the case without the control piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special variable prize ball device 6B is operated from the variable prize ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is provided in the big winning opening. When game balls are detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to open and the big winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the big winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the big winning hole to get a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When game balls are detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game balls pass through (enter) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the game balls enter the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls pass (enter) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to open and the special winning opening is opened, the state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning hole is closed, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) the special winning hole to obtain a prize ball. be at a disadvantage.

In addition, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball that has won in the second starting winning opening is provided. When game balls are detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start prize-winning opening and the second start prize-winning opening may be collectively referred to as the start prize-winning opening or the start opening.

In addition, in this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big win game or in a KT state (so-called small win time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs a shooting operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In this pachinko game machine 1, since the variable display of the normal symbols is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role of a normal starting area. However, even when a big win pattern is derived and displayed, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the state shifts to a big win game state, so the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both the normal starting region and the operating region.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a frame LED 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. .

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the left side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (so-called left-hand hitting operation). When a game ball enters a first starting winning hole formed in a winning ball device 6A by a player's turning operation of a hitting ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 to perform a left-handed operation, a first special symbol is displayed. A first special game is started by the device 4A.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the result is a "big hit". . Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing". It should be noted that even in the first special game, the small winning symbols may be stop-displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be a "small winning".

After the display result in the first special game becomes ``big win'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, we have prepared multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth, and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, probability variable state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a variable probability state, a KT state, or a high base state depending on the jackpot type.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

In the KT state, KT control is executed in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small win game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than in the big win game state, but the state is advantageous for the player.

In the high-base state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period of fluctuating special figures) than in the normal state (time saving state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming more than the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

The variable probability state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as execution of the special game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state, is met first. do. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut probability variation etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variable state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability of becoming, is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on) It is in a state where

When the jackpot game ends and the game state is controlled to the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation). A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern display device 20 starts a normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol varies depending on the type of big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the big winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the second special game becomes ``big hit'', on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the second special game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state.

In the small winning game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed).

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the lighting of the frame LED 9 Etc./turning off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100 . The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 83) from game control microcomputer 100, and outputs solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and for large winning entrance door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further controls a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-hand hitting notification LED 37. It supplies it to the substrate 13 and supplies an LED signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the LED) to the LED control substrate 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 based on the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed informing LED 37 are turned on/off. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lighting/extinguishing of the LED.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and LED signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). By the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution of the first special symbol game, management of suspension, etc. are realized (details will be described later). Moreover, CPU103 performs a 2nd special design process process (step S25B). By the CPU 103 executing the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes the role product control process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the control of the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the role product control process, normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal which is a process for outputting a test signal for checking the control state of the game machine outside the game machine processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 also performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period in which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big win game, during the small win game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control to output the right-handed test signal during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, the occurrence of start winning to the first start winning opening is detected, and the process of storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as the hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. be done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the first pending memory number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as generation of start winning, first pending memory number, prefetch determination etc. to the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this way is effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12 .

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result is determined. The jackpot type in the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. . After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing for determining either one. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". This first special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process is completed. do.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. During the variable display of the special symbols, there is a case where the variable display of the second special symbols results in a small hit and the game is controlled to a small winning game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing to determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small winning game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the first special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Further, for example, the small winning ending period as the small winning ending processing period may be configured to vary depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the period of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the suspension period become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decoration pattern, etc., resulting in an effect that gives the player a sense of incompatibility. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small winning ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the normal state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small winning control, and no particular performance is performed, so the small winning ending period is shortened compared to the second KT state. It may be configured to On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small winning control and an effect emphasizing the small winning control is executed, the small winning ending period may be lengthened compared to the first KT state. . In this case, for example, while the small winning ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, the small winning ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, the length of the small winning fanfare period as the small winning opening preprocessing period may be changed according to the game state, similarly to the small winning ending period.

The first special symbol stop processing of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops and displays (derives) the confirmed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. It contains the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big win", setting processing for starting the big win game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small win game is performed. And the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is ``small hit'' or ``losing'', when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the KT state, or the high base state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, the process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process will be described. Also, each random number value extracted in the first starting winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in a second pending storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as pending information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the second special symbol is varied. During the display, there is a case where the variable display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the game is controlled to a small win game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is opened. Processing-Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the small winning end processing), and if the small winning game is in progress, do not change the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. Thus, if it is not during the small winning game, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small winning game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is resumed after the small winning game is finished. controlled to do so. In addition to such control, for example, during a small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the second special symbol starts to change is interrupted (timer It may be configured to interrupt the update).

Incidentally, regarding the small winning control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small winning fanfare period and the small winning ending period may be varied depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process. In this role product control process processing, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the role product control process flag provided in the RAM 102 . In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the role product control process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The role product control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big winning game is performed, and if the setting for starting the big winning game is performed, the process for starting the big winning game is performed. , the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the role product control process flag is "2". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening pre-processing is completed.

The process during jackpot opening in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this process during the opening of the big win, a process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning hole is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the big winning gate to the closed state, the process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning gate door is executed, and then the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , ends the process during jackpot opening.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "4". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of execution times of the round has not reached the upper limit number of execution times, the value of the role control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of execution times of the round reaches the upper limit number of execution times, the character control process The flag value is updated to "5". When the value of the role product control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-processing ends.

The jackpot ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the role product control process flag is "5". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the special winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the role product control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". In this small winning open process, the processing of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning port is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small winning open processing is ended.

The small hit end process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various production devices such as actions is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production processing during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Portion 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 9-1, for example. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko game machine 1 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting switch 22A and a second starting switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various parts are connected, and the effect control board 12 is connected to various effect devices such as the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame LED 9, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 mainly has a random number setting function used in a special game, a function to input signals from switches etc. arranged at predetermined positions, and a sub-side control board consisting of a production control board 12 etc. , a function of outputting and transmitting a control command, which is an example of instruction information, as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to the management computer of the hall. In addition, the main substrate 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, thereby performing the first special symbol and the second special symbol. and control the variable display of the predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal design display device 20 to control the variable display of the normal design by the normal design display device 20 It also has control functions.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various types of prize winning information. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and detection signals from various switches for game ball detection, as well as various signals such as a power off signal, a clear signal, a reset signal, etc. 100, and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. (for example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when visually recognizing it. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower central portion of the back surface of the main board 11. FIG. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the game machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entering area" The number of game balls entered into the game ball is counted, and various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to check various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios and role ratios after installation in the game arcade. In other words, on the side of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is normal to design the game board so that the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and whether the game balls enter the general prize winning opening at the frequency as designed as a result of the adjustment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko game machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, can be changed. A clear switch (setting change-over switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches for this purpose are provided. A game arcade clerk or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, so that predetermined of operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) to be described later is performed. executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, power-on operation and initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. It is possible to operate only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF with a predetermined key. It may be a possible switch.

Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if force is not applied by the store clerk or the like of the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 is configured so that the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game arcade clerk or the like has to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. You can prevent it from being lost.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, at the lower part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is a mechanism for discharging the game balls that have entered the respective winning openings and the game balls that have entered the out openings to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (ejection port) is provided, and an ejection port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball ejected from the pachinko game machine 1 (detecting a fired game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110 .

A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15 . The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, a effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 9 and decorations. It contains LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED for use.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as payout control board 21TM037 and ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer containing at least a RAM. A payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, and an I/O port constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is implemented by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Also, the I/O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full-tank switch 21TM048 and the payout count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 includes a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and a game machine frame opening sensor that can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the door frame 3a is connected. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the game machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light-emitting element (LED) and a light-receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect jamming of game balls, that is, so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates that the ball has run out, and that the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates that the tank is full. , the ball delivery process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a low level signal to the ball launching board 21TM090 to stop the ball launching from the ball launching device. Output a full tank signal. A firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full tank signal from the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the ejection board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the ejection motor 21TM094 A signal serving to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals with the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. For confirmation, signals (prize request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prizing ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals through the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. , when receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (receiving ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 It is configured to exchange specific data between For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing the predetermined bits of the prize ball request signal, A ball request signal is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, it sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with this setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100 . In addition, when a predetermined error (such as a ball rental, full tank, or ball out error) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 .

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a lent ball number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal boards (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board) via the output port 21TM372b. and) output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted in FIG. 9B.

Also, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 of the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, a signal for instructing lighting/lighting-out is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. The input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 receives a detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ready-to-use display lamp, a connecting stand direction display, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball rental LED 21TM061, a ball rental switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

A ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given from the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendable display signal are supplied from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. A connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is sent and received via input port 21TM372f and output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this time point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and upon detecting the trailing edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to deliver a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not on, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC 24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. 6 is the highest ball payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the ball payout rate is. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages.

FIGS. 9-4A to 9-4F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display , the probability of winning the jackpot is lower (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", A jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. is subject to variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is decided to make a big win (big win A to big win F) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. "Probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the determination of the big hit is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. good too.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. Fig. 9-5 (1) is an example in which a "sunny" mode ending image is selected in the jackpot end screen, and Fig. 9-5 (2) is an example in which a "cloudy" mode ending screen is selected in the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5(3) shows an example in which an ending image of "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 9-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting values specified by the setting command.

CPU103 has transmitted the setting command which designates the setting value to CPU120 for production control. Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120 when the jackpot game state is ended. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored setting values by storing the setting values specified by the received setting commands in the RAM 102 . For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state is over, the image display device 5 is stored together with characters (“BONUS end” characters) for notifying that the jackpot game state is over. It is possible to display the ending image in the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

The table shown in FIG. 9-5(4) shows the cases where the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , respectively, when the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), when it is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 5 (3) is assigned a determination value for determining the "rain" mode.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the production (ending production), and at a medium rate (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion production (ending production) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2), and the medium (for example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, the effect control CPU120, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", at a low rate (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1) Determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high percentage (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect), determined to execute setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), moderate (for example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each aspect of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in the aspect in which the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is generated. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player is interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. I would expect it to be done.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are normal values as the set values stored in the set value storage area, and six stages of set values with different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), a value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the value may not be normal. If the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is checked whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when shifting to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it has been determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed. If the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be executed. This indicates that the In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM is not actually cleared, and when the setting change mode is set, the RAM is cleared after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. will be

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is non-set state). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. You can let it happen.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300. The sensor 21TM300 outputs to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been detected to be open, and a detection signal that indicates that the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game controlling microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side , the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 sends a detection signal indicating that the game machine frame 3 has been opened to the game control microcomputer 100, and the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to steps S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When shifting to the setting change mode, it becomes possible to confirm and change the setting value, and when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, it becomes possible to confirm the setting value.

That is, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and there is no power interruption during the setting change ( NO at step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070). Or confirmation becomes possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is closed (NO at step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is selected. Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later.

In this embodiment, in order to enter a state (setting confirmation mode) in which changing of the setting value is not permitted but the setting value can be confirmed, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value is changed, as will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the setting value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. can't If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 or that there is some kind of illegality. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of setting value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the setting value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is placed in the setting confirmation mode. and setting change mode.

In this embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Control is possible, but not limited to such a form, even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode may be controlled by none of the above.

On the other hand, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command), which will be described later, without being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), control is not performed in either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). will be controlled by mode. In addition, even if the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), it is controlled to the setting change mode based on the establishment of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later). In addition, if the setting change mode has been controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the establishment of the setting change mode transition conditions (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 to be described later). It will be.

At step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4120, if the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are If it is in the closed state, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), or if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON at step S21TM4140 If (NO in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 detects that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. The setting value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, display the message "There is a possibility that the set value is abnormal." Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn the power switch 21TM055 OFF), and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned ON). to perform an operation to change the set value (determine the set value). For example, it displays a message "After turning off the power, turn on the power again to shift to the setting change mode." It should be noted that the same notification may be made by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to indicate that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)." Even though there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (the determination of YES in all steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) has not been satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a call lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). be done.

During the period of the loop processing, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. The 4 ms wait prevents excessive heat from accumulating in the 7-segment display and causing damage to the display. Also, the security signal is continuously output during the period of the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5 ), it is possible to identify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 continues until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), or if power failure occurs during setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before proceeding to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) to (3) are all satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the CPU 103 enters a state in which the setting value can be changed ( setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the setting value in the setting value storage area cannot be fixed to the normal value because the change of the setting value is not permitted. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any one of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the above-described loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed.

If the loop processing (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) is performed, the normal game processing cannot be performed. not. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not met, the power is turned off once, and the conditions (1) to (3) are all met when the power is turned on next time. Then, the setting change mode is entered, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to the regular value.

It should be noted that the CPU103, when any of the conditions of (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, predetermined It is also possible to prompt the user to turn off the power by emitting light in the power-off instruction mode.

In this embodiment, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be checked (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (YES at step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES at step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the control to the setting confirmation mode is not performed even if the two conditions are met. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled in either setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the regular value (one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( step S21TM4510). If a normal value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the set value storage area does not store the normal value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores "0", which has the lowest jackpot probability, in the set value storage area as the normal value. is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes power-off processing (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure has been input. Immediately before the device becomes inoperable due to the stoppage, the power supply stoppage processing is executed. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled (repeated processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650), the power supply If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be executed appropriately in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display values corresponding to the set values (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the values (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the game hall clerk normally recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall clerk may actually setting value may be mistakenly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area +1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 determines that the setting value has been changed. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility that the setting is being changed is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even if the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is turned off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is set (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to inform that the game machine is being controlled in the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated setting values are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the game arcade clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is set (when the power is turned on or when the power was cut off last time) is 3. If so, the set values stored in the set value storage area are updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmit the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650). ) and updating of the setting value (step S21TM4620) corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determination of YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determination of NO in step S21TM4040 indicates that the RAM clear flag is set). remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and output a security signal (step S21TM4560), and to transmit a setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the setting value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070 or S21TM4130) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040 or S21TM4140). is determined and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

Note that the setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms is performed again (step S21TM4530), and then the processing from step S21TM4540 is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

At step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF (YES at step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets the value of the security signal timer to 1000 ms (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the normal game process is started. will be For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when it reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode are started. The value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of control in any of the modes. set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the processing for starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether control is performed in the setting change mode or in the setting confirmation mode (it is determined which mode is controlled). ) is executed as a common process. Also, in the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710, regardless of whether the control was performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (it is necessary to determine which mode the control was in). ) is executed as a common process. In this way, the output control of the security signal is simplified by making the security signal output start control and output end control common between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. , the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. , it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that there is a possibility that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, a common value (1000 ms) is set as a security signal in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. It's set on a timer. However, if the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are made common between the setting change mode control and the setting change mode control, which mode the external device side selects. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, once the security signal is cleared in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, the security signal timer value is reset (overwritten) to 30000 ms in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared. there is That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is temporarily set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 second has elapsed since the setting change mode was set, and 30 seconds have passed since the setting change mode was terminated.

Specifically, if it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after interrupt permission In processing (for example, information output processing), if security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from 1000 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal is continued until the In addition, when it is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms ) to 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the game control timer interrupt process may be performed.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the control in the setting confirmation mode and the control in the setting change mode are finished, and the control is performed in the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the control in the setting change mode was completed. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between when the setting confirmation mode is controlled and when the setting change mode is controlled, while the output control of the security signal is made common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the setting confirmation mode was controlled without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process was executed and the setting change mode was controlled. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process. It is possible to presume that there is a possibility that the change processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

Note that the security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is powered off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area (an area cleared by initialization processing) of the RAM 102 based on the detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, since the RAM is not cleared, the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to output the security signal continuously for four minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period until one second elapses after the end of control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs At times, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal is output for a period of 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode (depending on the execution of RAM clearing). period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, for example, 50 ms or longer. That is, a common security signal timer value of 50 ms may be set for both when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) when the power is restored when the power is subsequently turned off. Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Note that even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the setting value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is displayed as it is on the side of the effect control CPU 120. If they are displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set values. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the value specified by the setting command (0 to 5) plus 1 is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 Within the range, a production that suggests the set value is executed.

In addition, not limited to such a form, CPU103 is set to the setting command the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area, effect control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of setting values specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command are displayed as they are on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. In addition, it becomes unnecessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Also, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big win game state ends according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). YES at S21TM4020), and no power interruption occurred during the setting change (NO at step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO at step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the power-off recovery process without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and the game control timer interrupt processing (special (including pattern process processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 clears the RAM based on the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power failure recovery, and the normal game processing is started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the power supply was restored based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). ). When the performance control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the performance devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, the restoration from the power interruption was performed based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that (the RAM is not cleared).

On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that RAM clear has been set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150 and it has been decided to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute power-on processing accompanied by RAM clearing.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting the value of the security signal timer to 30 seconds, and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , It is sufficient to shift to the game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) after the interrupt permission.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability variable flag, time saving flag, reserved storage, etc.) is cleared, and the initial value is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as consecutive ratio, role ratio, and base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value is unchanged from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the letter "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for determining per normal symbol) is initialized to 0, but any value or predetermined value may be initialized to In addition, without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol per determination) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set values stored in the set value storage area are not cleared in this RAM clearing process is that (a) if control is not performed in the setting change mode, the set value storage area does not contain the regular values when the power is turned on; (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if the setting change mode is set, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, it is not possible to control to the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the values stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the top address of the table set at initialization stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the table set at initialization in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for judging a normal symbol, a special symbol buffer, a buffer for storing the total number of winning balls, a special symbol process flag, etc. An initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the later-described game control timer interrupt processing, big hit determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this initialization command, the initialization process is performed (RAM clearing is performed without restoring from power interruption based on the data at the time of power supply stop). recognized). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9, initialization of the game state etc. (data at the time of power supply stop) It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from power failure based on .

Next, CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the security signal timer value (1 second) set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM is cleared without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second). ), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being performed. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is set to 1 second set in step S21TM4710. remain.

At this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the value of the security signal timer is set, so that the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process), After that, every time the timer interrupt process for game control is executed by interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. will be

Then, the CPU 103 executes setting processing for the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes random number circuit setting processing for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). CPU103, for example, by executing the processing according to the random number circuit setting program, performs the setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). For example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt occurs periodically every 2 ms.

Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interrupt process can be executed, and the process shifts to the normal game process. In this embodiment, the random number for display is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, and a random number for determining whether or not to be a ready-to-win when it is not a big hit. Random number update processing is processing for updating the count value of a counter for generating display random numbers. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value determines the initial value of the count value of the counter (random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) for generating random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is a hit. It is a random number for A game control process for controlling the progress of a game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as a performance display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself). processing, or processing of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the normal per symbol determination random number is one cycle (normal per symbol determination random number After stepping by the number of numerical values between the minimum and maximum possible values, an initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), on the condition that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state (depending on the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a ), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power failure recovery.

Further, in this example, when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process at power-on (processing after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) is shifted to, but in such a form However, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process at power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, when the power is turned on, the game hall clerk or the like turns on the lock switch 21TM051 and turns on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 to switch the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting change mode. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state etc. (execute RAM clearing). In addition, by turning ON the lock switch 21TM051 and turning OFF the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko game machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state, etc. is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the game hall clerk can select whether to control the pachinko game machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state and the like. there is

As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was set when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the setting value to be confirmed by the game arcade is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game stop state (step loop processing of S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is started in an unstable state of the set value (game control timer interrupt processing is executed) while preventing that, when the power is turned on, the power It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled to the setting change mode when the interruption occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines the condition for shifting to the setting change mode ( Steps S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not established, the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor in the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) 21TM029 displays an error by displaying the letter "E" (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs to the game parlor clerk (in the setting change mode). (the possibility that a power outage may have occurred in a controlled state) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the set value abnormality error command, displays a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode." After turning off the power once (turning off the power switch 21TM055), when the power is turned on again (when turning on the power switch 21TM055), the clerk or the like is instructed to shift to the setting change mode and change the setting value. (fix the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES at step S21TM4130); and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). YES), control is performed in the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. Please let me shift to the setting change mode.") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the fact that the image display device 5 was controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052) ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, it is possible to cause the image display device 5 to display a message "You are in setting change mode" or a message "Please perform a setting change operation to change the setting value". As a result, a game arcade clerk or the like can grasp that the setting change mode is being controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area can be changed. is changed to the set value as planned, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the set value can be fixed and the pachinko game machine 1 can be shifted to normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, one of the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions are not met, without being controlled to the setting change mode, it is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) after sending the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190) . As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power. to switch to the setting change mode.") will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to switch to the setting change mode." It is reported that the state is not established. In this case, the store clerk or the like at the game parlor understands that the setting change mode is not controlled and the game is in the stopped state (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again after operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. In the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF. By switching to the state, it is possible to fix the set value and shift the pachinko game machine 1 to the normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, in the case of (a) that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored, an error is displayed on the main substrate 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029). The mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being interrupted, so that unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be properly changed.

On the other hand, in the case of (b) where the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored, it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is interrupted during the setting change mode. Therefore, the game is forcibly stopped (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is stopped. will be done. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and transition condition (i ) to (iii) are not established, a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal and the mode has been transitioned to the setting change mode (or the transition condition is satisfied). , and the effect control CPU 120 that receives this command displays an image of the message "There is a possibility that the setting value is abnormal" and the message "It will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode". It is preferable to display it on the device 5 . On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game process is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. (turned from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch (clear switch ) 21 TM052 is operated (changed from OFF state to ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 .

Then, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting changeover switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though there is no such operation, and notify that effect. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification by displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification is executed by displaying the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." As a result, the store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade clearly grasps that the operation for changing the setting value has been performed even though neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, It is possible to check whether the

It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (timer interrupt process for game control) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 .

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the setting change mode was entered (NO in step S21TM4570).

As shown in FIG. 9-11, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. It is also possible to set the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150) and shift to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is established.

In the processing shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) or if the setting value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without judging whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. 9-6 differs from the process shown in FIG. 9-6 in that it is controlled to the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled to the game stop state (process corresponding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a configuration, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the setting change mode is entered. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. and the setting value in the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting change flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the mode to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is established, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, if the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting It will be controlled in change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determination of YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the game arcade clerk who has changed the setting value must first turn the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state in order to finalize the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the setting change mode control is determined whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). are made different, while the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. Appropriately shifting to normal game processing is made.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), it is possible to issue a notification prompting the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value abnormality error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Execute corresponding processing), and the effect control CPU 120 that received the set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, ``Turn ON the lock switch once, and switch it to OFF after changing the set value.'' A message may be displayed on the image display device 5 .

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the game machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before it is installed in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, so that the game machine 1 can be set in the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko game machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value memory control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, setting value storage control in the case of power failure during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed.

First, FIG. 9 shows the control in the case where the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the power is turned off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode ends). -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. In this example, "0" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to "0" based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. is changed to "2", and "3" obtained by adding 1 to the set value after change is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation to end the setting change mode is performed, power failure occurs. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. In the power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned ON (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned ON) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

When the power is turned on in turn 6, the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when applying the control shown in FIGS. Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the 6th and 7th turns may be the OFF state.

In this way, if the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (without the setting change mode being terminated), the power supply is interrupted. , the setting value after change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, when the power supply is restored, there are cases where the set values have already been set, and in this case, the game arcade clerk terminates the setting change mode without changing the set values again. Since it is sufficient to shift the game machine to the normal game process by pressing the button, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power failure occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, Description will be made with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12(1), and the explanation is omitted. Next, as shown in sequence 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, thereby ending the setting change mode. As a result, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is determined as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and "3", which is the determined set value plus 1, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power supply switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (and the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. FIG. This set value "2" is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in sequence 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to "1". is added to display "3" on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in Figures 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power supply is interrupted while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set values that have been changed in accordance with the previous setting change operation in the setting change mode, that is, the set values that were stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power was turned off, are restored. , are valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area at the time of power restoration).

Note that the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 is not limited. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is operated. 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (turning on the lock switch 21TM051). state to the OFF state) is performed, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to determine the setting value. can be In this case, the setting values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 are the values (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting values (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is also changed according to the change of the setting value stored in the .

With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting If the power is cut off without completing the operation for terminating the change mode (without the lock switch 21TM051 being switched to the OFF state), the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 will be It means that it has not been changed from the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). In other words, in the power supply stop state, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area at the time of the previous power-on are continuously held. Therefore, the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set after the power is restored are stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power was turned on last time. It will be a value according to the setting value that was set.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for gaming machines with different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, for all setting values 0 to 5 It can also be applied to a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability is 1/300.

In addition, the following inventions are disclosed in this characterizing portion 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting changing means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In addition, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a “jackpot signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value etc. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in JP-A-2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. be. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can control the setting confirmation mode that can confirm the setting value,
Specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal at step S21TM4560) for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode; ,
setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (security signal timer value) relating to the period in which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (one second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation mode). Upon termination, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was terminated, and upon termination of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the termination of the setting change mode. do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled in the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting the value of the security signal timer to 1 second in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode. (The security signal will continue to be output until 30 seconds have passed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output for at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value in both cases when the control in the setting change mode and the control in the setting confirmation mode are finished, and the setting change is performed. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode while the setting processing by the setting means is made common. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without a specific operation (detection of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode. in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Equipped with a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on this,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). In the specific information storage means (the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing specific information when stopped, a setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is completed. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to send an error command to the effect control means while executing error notification in the display means (send a set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190, and display monitor in the error display of step S21TM4210 21TM029 can display the letter "E"),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to enter the setting change mode. Please let me migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The inventions relating to the means P1 to P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a game machine that appropriately notifies the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), error notification means capable of executing error notification (game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means confirms that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting can be controlled to the setting change mode based on the changeover switch (21TM052 is ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) case), it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the establishment of the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are all executed). Based on the determination of YES, the process shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed to the setting change mode without executing the error notification, thereby avoiding the unnecessary error notification and appropriately changing the setting value. Can encourage change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the power is turned on, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140) ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
With production control means (production control CPU 120) that controls the execution of production,
The game control means is
display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620),
and the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration, it is determined that the setting change flag is set case), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit the set value abnormal error command in step S21TM4190 and display in the error display of step S21TM4210 It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of prompting an operation to change the setting value ("Turn on the power again after turning off the power to enter the setting change mode. Please let me migrate" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the gaming arcade, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a setting change means for changing setting values in multiple stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine such as that described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set values. The inventions relating to means Q1 to Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) ,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of changing setting values to a setting change mode,
A specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated). A game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag at step S21TM4720 based on that,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102);
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration) is set), control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON, regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the game state.
The gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the game state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). A game control microcomputer 100 that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
If the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode).
According to this, when a power failure occurs during setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. is executed), and the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and when being controlled in the setting change mode It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled in the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Erasing the specific information when the setting change mode ends based on (clearing the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends),
When the power supply to the game machine is started, the setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation has been performed. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not, automatically control to the setting change mode), and terminate the setting change mode based on the specific operation (end the setting change mode based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). let)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the conditions for ending the control in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation performed while being controlled in the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610, change the set value stored in the set value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled in the setting change mode (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). based on the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to change the value in the setting change mode by the change operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (The setting value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is cleared. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
Set value storage means (set value storage area of RAM 102 where set values are stored) for storing set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for judging big hits),
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (jackpot determination processing etc. in special symbol process processing),
The setting change mode control means stores in the setting value storage area when a change operation is performed under control in the setting change mode and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. changing only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and changing the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on a specific operation after the change operation; The setting change mode is ended (when it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area). to confirm it as a valid set value and end the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means stores the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed while the setting change mode is being controlled. (Even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched OFF, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is stored. is not changed, so if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, it is possible to restrict the change of the setting value.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 052IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 052IW will be described. First, the game state in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. First, the game state in the characterizing portion 052IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small win time) in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. The case of being controlled, the case of being controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and the case of being controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). , is controlled to a high probability and second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, resulting in a small hit. Even if is generated, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the high base state is controlled so that the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is delivered to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the control is performed so that small hits are likely to occur and the low base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state due to a normal game hit is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of determining a small hit is low when the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio of determining a small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates is high (however, it will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the variation of the second special symbol, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the configuration for making the KT state into a game state in which a small win is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal hit is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of variation in the KT state to a certain period of time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be 0.6 seconds or longer. Specifically, the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the downflow path of the game ball are adjusted. Although details will be described later, this characteristic portion 052IW is configured such that the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the required time until the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one game ball passes through the passage gate 41. game balls can win prizes in the variable winning ball device 6B as they are.

(Special Variable Winning Ball Device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the characteristic portion 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which game balls flow down. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state in which it is forwardly moved, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has entered the big winning hole is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has entered the big winning hole is further guided to the guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. FIG. The guiding path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102, 103, and the game ball guided to the guiding path 052IW100 is guided to the left path 052IW102 or the right path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V-area 052IW104 and is detected by the V-area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left path 052IW102. A ball enters left path 052IW 102 and can enter V-region 052IW 104 . Also, when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

In addition, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the jackpot game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, and after the jackpot game ends It is controlled to a variable state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the sum of the number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that there is a discrepancy error between entry and exit into the big winning slot, and an error notification may be made. In this case, it takes a certain amount of time for the winning game ball to reach the V area 052IW104 or the discharge area 052IW105 just before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after it becomes, it may be determined as a big winning entrance entry/ejection mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in this characteristic portion 052IW. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes the gate switch 21, the starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), the count switch (first count switch In addition to detection signals from 23 and second count switch 24)), detection signals from V area switch 052IW106 and discharge area switch 052IW107 are captured and transmitted to game control microcomputer 100.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 receives the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and for the big winning entrance door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, it is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability for each set value. Among them, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six steps from setting value "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the big-hit probability and the small-hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), the winning probability of the overall jackpot is 10 times compared to the non-variable state (low probability state), and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the setting value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10-4, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-variable state (low probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "247/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the variable probability state (high probability state), compared to the non-variable probability state (low probability state), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as a whole, and the setting The value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2470/65536". It is high and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of the set value "1" to "6" state) and probability variable state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common in the non-variable probability state and the variable probability state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), the small hit is higher. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when performing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when performing the variable display of the first special symbol greater than the number of decision values for the decision). In this way, even if the big hit probability is changed according to the set value, the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), the probability are set to different values from "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10-4). -3 and as shown in FIG. 10-4, there is no set value for which the probability of deviation is 0). The judgment value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the setting value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which setting value is "1" to "6" , with different outlier probabilities).

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured such that, for example, there is a case where the probability of deviation is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to deviation). For example, at the set value "6", which has the highest degree of advantage (highest jackpot probability), the probability of losing is 0, and the judgment value corresponding to the losing may not be included.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured so that there is a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit may not be included. good.

In addition, in FIGS. 10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the probability of a small hit is matched between the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state) The odds of losing are different, but in the probability state (high probability state), the jackpot probability has increased for the non-probability state (low probability state), so the probability of a small hit is higher than the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the out-of-probability. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine having substantially less than 6 levels of settable levels or a gaming machine with no difference in the degree of advantage due to the setting change function, a game machine of a type having a setting change function of 6 levels and a hardware/software configuration are provided. can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern, the types of jackpots are determined as ``2R normal jackpot'', ``2R probability variable jackpot'', and `` This is a table referred to for determining any of the 6R normal jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, A "10R variable probability big hit" is determined with a probability of 9%, a "6R variable probability big hit" is determined with a probability of 56%, and a "6R normal jackpot" is determined with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is determined as "10R variable jackpot" with a probability of 10%, "6R variable jackpot" with a probability of 50%, "2R variable jackpot" with a probability of 5%, and with a probability of 35% " 2R normal jackpot".

"10R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "6R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game state is completed.

"6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls to a jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot game state is completed. A "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state and controlled to a low-probability state after the jackpot game state ends.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of "10R probability variable jackpot", "6R probability variable jackpot" and "6R normal jackpot", a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. Until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, the big winning holes are controlled to be open, and up to 10 big winning holes can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of the ``2R probability variable jackpot'' and the ``2R normal jackpot'', the big prize opening is controlled to be open only for a short period of time (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the jackpot game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the big win game is finished, it is controlled to the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big win game and the kind of the big win. How the game state transitions after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type determination table)
10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result should be a small win pattern, the types of the small wins are set to "small hit A" and "small hit B" based on the random number for the hit type determination. ” or “small win C”.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as "small hit A" with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is determined as a "small win B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined as a "small win C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small win game (see FIGS. 10-12), and the small win game You can hardly expect the game ball to enter the special winning hole inside. Further, in the case of "small win B", the special winning hole is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small winning game (see FIGS. 10-13), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be expected to some extent. In addition, in the case of "small win C", the special winning hole is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small winning game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball enters the special winning hole during the small winning game. can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in this characterizing portion 052IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special design and decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special design and decorative design 34 types #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, fluctuation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06 is determined.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the case of the KT state (low probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state), in FIG. 10-7 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09 is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the game is lost, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined as a small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when determining a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic portion 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is achieved, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game balls into the special winning opening. end up Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the second special symbol is displayed in a non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. By lowering , the frequency of occurrence of small hits is rather reduced, thereby preventing a situation in which an attempt is made to acquire prize balls by small hits even in the non-KT state. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the "occurrence frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, is higher than normal.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is is comparatively long as 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at a prize ball by winning a prize in the special prize winning opening unfairly during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big win, it is not necessary to digest the first reserved memory longer than in the case of a small win, so the variation time is set to be shorter than in the case of a small win. there is

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the low probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #04 to #06 is determined by

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is lost, the variation time is 5 seconds and the shortened variation is the second variation pattern # 04. It is determined. Also, when determining a small hit as the first variation in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 05 (second start winning opening open Preparatory fluctuation pattern). In this characteristic part 052IW, as already explained, when it is controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is lengthened. A special winning hole in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediate. If the device 17 is controlled to be open, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will enter the special prize winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the first variation of the 1KT state, by ensuring a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are activated before the transition to the 1KT state. By controlling the special variable prize winning ball device 17 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member fall down to enable prize winning to the special prize winning port, This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which more prize balls than expected are obtained in the 1KT state. Also, when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In addition, if the 2nd to 49th variation display is to be performed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1st KT state is completed, then the variation display of the 2nd to 49th variation is executed as shown in FIG. 10-8 ( The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT shown in E) and for the 2nd to 49th variation is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 Either is decided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / 1st KT state are missed, the fluctuation time is 5 seconds and the short fluctuation second fluctuation pattern # 07, or the second variation pattern #08, which is a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/first KT state are missed, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. In addition, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations of the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #10 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shorter variation time of 1 second. It may be determined to be the second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation. On the other hand, when determining a small hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #07 and #10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #08 and #11 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variations in the low probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

In addition, after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability/1KT state, the 50th change display (that is, the final change in the low probability/1KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for low probability/first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / 1st KT state, any of the second variation patterns #14 to #16 is determined by

In the characterizing portion 052IW, when the control is made to the low probability/first KT state, for example, a character display such as "in chance time" is displayed on the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/1st KT state is a loss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!" is determined to be the second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display of performing In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when determining a big hit as the 50th variation of the low probability/1st KT state, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Chance time is over!" The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined resurrection display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is achieved by the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. configured to determine This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a forced loss, the forced failure occurs frequently and the player wins a small win despite being in the second KT state. You will not receive any benefit from Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the transition to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is made before the frequent occurrence of the forced loss. It is configured.

In addition, unlike this characteristic portion 052IW, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration that does not force the variation of the second special symbol (for example, the first When the second special symbol is fluctuating when the special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly removed), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit during the KT state. may be a long variable time (eg, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state due to the variation display of the first special symbol. You will not be able to receive any profits from small wins. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state is set to a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, there is enough time to generate at least multiple small hits. (eg, 1 minute).

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/1st KT state, the fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability/1st KT state. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and varied. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #17 to #21 is determined by

As with the first variation in the low-probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern #17, which is short variation of 5 seconds, is determined. On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. In addition, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for preparing for opening the second start winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-9(G), when determining a big hit as the first variation in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Also, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot that triggered the high probability / 1st KT state, the high probability shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) A second special symbol variation pattern table for probability/first KT and second and subsequent variations is selected to determine a variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation in the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28 determined by

As with the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/1st KT state, as shown in FIG. A second variation pattern #22 of shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds or a second variation pattern #23 of shortened variation with an even shorter variation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a miss as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/first KT state, it may be determined to the second variation pattern #24 with reach. In addition, when determining a small hit as the second and subsequent variations of the high probability/1st KT state, the second variation pattern #25 with a shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds, or a shortened variation with a shorter variation time of 1 second The second variation pattern #26 of variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as a small hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are those in which one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage of the reserved memory is expedited and the operating rate is increased. Also, when determining a big hit as the second and subsequent variations in the high-probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is A variation pattern is determined upon selection. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, any one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34 is determined. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be a failure in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #29 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In other cases, the second variation pattern #30 of normal variation with a variation time of 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a miss in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. Also, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds or a normal variation time of 5 seconds The second variation pattern #33 of variation may be determined. Also, when determining a big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed, the current game state, and the result of the variable display are determined. Using the variation pattern table, lottery processing is performed based on the random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability/second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) It is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a small hit variation pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing the variation display of the small hit , regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern #33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of shortened variation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state was shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of the 1st KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of the 2nd KT state with a high probability , but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, it may be configured such that a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is performed in the case of a low probability state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed in the case of a high probability state.

(Open pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. 10-11 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. FIG. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled to a jackpot game based on a 10R variable probability big hit, a 6R variable probability big hit, and a 2R variable probability big hit (hereinafter also simply referred to as "variable probability big hit"). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. controlled by When a game ball wins while the big winning hole is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23 .

In addition, in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball into the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and the V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to an open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period of time (eg, 29 seconds) elapses in the first round or a predetermined number (eg, 10) of prizes are detected in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), a special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state after the big hit game is over. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period starts at the timing when the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to open, and the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is opened. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after being controlled to the closed state again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled to the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "normal jackpot"). Describe the pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the jackpot game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. controlled by When a game ball wins while the big winning hole is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23 .

Also, in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, as shown in FIG. The area switch plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for a very short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in the first round or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are detected in the large winning opening, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), a special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after a very short opening period (in this example, 0.02 seconds) of the V-area opening/closing plate 052IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the variable probability jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball is likely to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and is likely to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined effective period of detection, and it is extremely rare to be controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, in this example, in the big win game based on the variable probability big win, game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the big win game than in the big win game based on the normal big win.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. FIG. 10-13 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. FIG. 10-14 show opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. FIG. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2). 10-14(2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

First, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the 1KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 Variation display of the pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加be done. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the variation time of normal symbols is set to 0.2 seconds, and winning symbols and losing symbols are derived and displayed. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the pattern fixing time 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening is opened. After 0.1 second of the pre-processing time has passed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning hole.

When a game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small winning symbols are derived and displayed, if the small winning is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). , in the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), the special variable prize winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole (however, in the case of a small hit A, , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, winning can hardly be expected). However, in the 1KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12(1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although small hits are likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to enter the special winning hole (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuation displays).

In the 1KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), after finishing the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the next normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, has passed. be. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the total of the normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because the time from the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 to the arrival of the game ball at the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the game ball normally does not change the pattern. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when it is controlled to the state. Therefore, in the 1KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed easily wins the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the release patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 Variation display of the pattern is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal pattern hit, the winning pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20, and when it is determined to be a loss, the lost pattern is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20.例文帳に追加be done. In this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variation time of the normal pattern is set to 1.0 seconds, and the winning pattern and the losing pattern are derived and displayed. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning pattern is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the pattern fixing time 0.2 seconds has passed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole.

When the game ball wins in the second starting prize opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is decided to make a small hit, A small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small winning symbols are derived and displayed, if the small winning is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). , in the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and a game ball can enter the special winning hole.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is at least 3.8 seconds (ordinary design fluctuation time 1.0 seconds + design determination time 0 A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening processing is ensured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. , Compared to the 1KT state, the game ball is likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is likely to enter the special winning hole. However, in the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds, so even in the 2KT state, the winning of game balls into the special winning opening can hardly be expected.

In addition, in the second KT state, game balls are likely to enter the special winning hole and prize balls are easily obtained. ” is displayed.

Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed according to which of the small winning types A to C is shown, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be varied depending on which of the small wins A to C the small win type is. In this case, for example, in the case of the small win A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small win game, while in the case of the small win B or the small win C, the small win game is performed. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) ) may be configured to provide a small hit type in which game balls can win to some extent, and various aspects are conceivable. Also, in this example, a case was shown in which there are three types of small wins A to C, but the configuration is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, four or more types of small wins may be provided. good too.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the normal pattern fluctuation time 1.0 seconds, the pattern confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-processing time 2.6 seconds, and the game ball It is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the state where the normal symbols are not changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is more The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal pattern is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable prize winning ball device 6B before being controlled to . Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for a game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state in which the normal symbols are not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (see step S26) is executed. In addition, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, determines whether the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), or whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a jackpot game state or not, the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) is used to determine whether or not to hit a regular pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the normal symbol fluctuation time and the symbol fixing time are the same in the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state by 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening processing is the same. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is varied by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state, but that is the only aspect. can't For example, by making the variation time and the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning hole opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning hole opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be varied by changing the variable winning ball device 6B. In particular, by shortening the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of prizes in the special winning openings in the first KT state. .

As will be described later, in the first KT state, the characteristic portion 052IW sets a high base flag indicating the high base state to control the state to a high base state. As shown in 10-14(1), control is performed to lengthen the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B. Also, in the second KT state, by controlling to the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. It is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens the variable winning ball device 6B for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short period of time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the 1KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the jackpot game state.

Also, even in the first KT state, when executing the last variable display in the low probability/first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol variation stop in the 50 special symbol shortened variation periods in the low probability/first KT state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being open for a long time when the left-hand shot is notified after the low probability/first KT state is ended. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the flag (special flag) for controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variable display of the special symbol is used. In this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

Also, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case of the low probability/non-KT state (left-handed state), when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability, only a few game balls are shot. , it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low-probability/non-KT state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the variation time of normal symbols is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning balls are variable winning balls in a state where the normal symbols are stopped from varying and there is no reserved memory of the normal symbols. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture aiming at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (when it becomes a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball passing through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the winning of the special winning hole becomes possible). On the other hand, in this characteristic portion 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. is set to start, it is possible to eliminate capture elements by a shooting operation aimed at the timing of occurrence of a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Production control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are ornaments variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to variable display of special symbols. It is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the symbol. It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of the decoration pattern. Control.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (loss designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command (10R probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variation jackpot). . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variable jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variable jackpot. . The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variable jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variable jackpot. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result specifying command for the first special symbol, and the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result specifying command for the second special symbol, so the display result The designation command can be used for both the first special design and the second special design, but the display result designation command for the first special design and the display result designation command for the second special design may be separate.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the display result designation command, but corresponds to 10R variable probability big hit/6R probability variable big win/6R normal big win/2R probability variable big win/2R normal big win/minor win/loss. A variation pattern command is determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that designates that lighting of the right-handed display 26 has been started.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol determination designation command) capable of specifying stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first compulsory design confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special design is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second compulsory design confirmation designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special design is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX(H) (X=arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big win game to the end of the big win game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. B001(H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) that designates the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates a display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates display after a round (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won in the first start winning opening while the number of first reserved memories has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second start winning opening while the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 .

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the game state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high probability/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that designates the currently set setting value. Note that the setting value is set to "XX". For example, when the setting value is set to "1", command E101(H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound control board 13. FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(First special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A, it means that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is checked. If the first pending memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (step 052IWS53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS54A). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the first reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiably preserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS 55A. A set value command is also sent when

The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. It may be configured to

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is set, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued. If there is, it is determined to be in the low probability/first KT state and a low probability/first KT background designation command is issued. Determine the high probability/first KT background designation command, and if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off, determine that it is in the high probability/second KT state and execute the high probability/second KT background designation command, Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol is in the midst of a big hit variation (step 052IWS57A). Concretely, when the second big win flag indicating that the big win will be made is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big win variation. When it is determined that the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the second special pattern, it is forcibly lost regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 052IWS57A, when the second special pattern is in the midst of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 052IWS59A, at the time of starting winning A win may be forcibly determined regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained.

Also, for example, when the second special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 052IWS57A, the process of steps 052IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and a random value (fixed value) is set as the random number for hit determination, and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the middle of the big hit variation, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A), and executes the big hit determination module (step 052IWS59A). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (or the random number for the small-hit determination) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small win flag indicating that a small win will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052 IWS 66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 052IWS67A), and stores the minor winning type (step 052IWS68A). Incidentally, in this example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of remaining high base states is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. Move to If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72A) and shortens the variable display of the special symbols. Reset the special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control (step 052IWS73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended until the end of variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this characteristic portion 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at a low probability at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot. This is the case where 50 times of fluctuation display is performed under control to the /high base state (low probability/first KT state). In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. Along with being reset, step 052IWS73A, step 052IWS73A, S73B also reset the special figure time-saving flag, it will shift to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) continues the right-handed notification and continues the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as a game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state This is a flag for setting the effect background in common with the first KT state while maintaining the state.

In this example, the process of step 052IWS74A and the process of step 052IWS74B, which will be described later, are executed, and the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the first special symbol variable display or the second special symbol variable display. When the final variation of (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set to extend the variation reduction state. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends Or, according to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variable shortening state is completed. is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(First variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special figure time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. (Step 052IWS1700A). In addition, in this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, so that it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 10-7 (see FIG. 10-9), the state is controlled to the KT state because it becomes a state in which small hits are likely to occur. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, non-shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) Select the first special symbol variation pattern table for time (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It determines which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. measurement is started (step 052IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First Special Symbol Variation Processing) FIG. 10-19 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation processing (step S112A) in the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the role product control process flag indicates the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 control to transmit to (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052 IWS 1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

When the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B is displaying the big hit symbol (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set.

If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a second small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol. If the second special symbol display device 4B does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the second special symbol display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 052IWS1127A). . It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed will result in a big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big win, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big win type is a 10R probability variable big hit or a 6R probability variable big hit (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 6R probability variable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 6R probability variable jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the big-hit symbol (Y of step 052IWS1125A), or when the minor-hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variable big hit or the 6R probability variable big hit. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y of step 052IWS1127A, N of step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 instructs the effect control CPU 120 to display the first compulsory symbol. Control is performed to transmit the confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In the case where the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot) is being executed, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is displayed. A situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs at the same time with the second special symbol is prevented. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted at step 052IWS1129A. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the probability variable big hit (in this example, the 10R probability variable big hit or the 6R probability variable big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is Based on the small winning, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small winning game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1120A is determined as N, steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A are skipped, and step 052IWS1122A does not update the first variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a probability variation big win is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small win game. is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. If there is, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N of step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small win and the variation display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small win game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small winning game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performed the right-handed operation is in favor of the player and the hit-right indicator 26 is illuminated. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low-probability/first KT state, but the 50th variation display is performed by executing the processing of steps 052IWS69A-S74A and S69B-S74B. At the start, the low probability/1st KT state is terminated and the transition to the normal state (non-KT state) is performed, and the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to end the 50th fluctuation display. When doing so, the right-handed display 26 is extinguished.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). Incidentally, in this case, if the first compulsory design confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special design variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the first special design is forced as the stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot will start (step 052IWS2016A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the first special symbol, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

In this example, after the big-hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big-hit game is started based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, so the right-hand shot is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N of step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 052IWS2021A). Also, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally more advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. However, as already explained, when a small win is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the type of the small win is only a small win A, and winning of the game ball into the special winning hole can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hitting indicator 26 is not lit, and the right hitting lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area. there is In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41 as a right hitting notification. may be

In addition, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed with the second special pattern, the right hitting notification and the launch promotion notice are not executed, and when the game ball wins in the first start winning hole in that state, the right hitting notice and the launch promotion notice are given. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for passage through the gate, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the first special symbol variable display is not started immediately, and the first reservation storage is performed) can be configured to

Conversely, when the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output at a low volume or small screen display). may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to shoot the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, the degree of recognition is high (for example, loud sound output, (Large screen display) may be configured to notify left-handed players. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately perform the launch notification. In particular, according to the above configuration, for a player who accidentally shoots a game ball to the right side of the game area, a slight left-handed notification is given in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, a left-handed notification may be given in a mode in which the degree of awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to encourage the player who intentionally hits to the right to return to the action to hit to the left by the store clerk of the amusement arcade.

Further, in the above case, when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening reaches a certain number, it may be configured to perform left-handed notification. In addition, at the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected multiple times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), left-handed notification is performed, and at the second start winning opening and special winning opening, more than a predetermined number It may be configured such that when game balls of a specific number (for example, one) or more are detected, a left-handed notification is performed.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic part 052IW, a demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display being executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the character product control process flag indicates the normal character product control process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role product control process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second pending memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102, (step 052IWS53B), decrease the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract 1 from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter), and shift the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is changed to the second reserved memory number=n− Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved memory number is extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It's like That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so the order in which each random number value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, the set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052 IWS 55B. A set value command is also sent when

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). It should be noted that the specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit variation (step 052IWS57B). Concretely, when the first big win flag indicating that the big win is to be achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the first special symbol is in the midst of the big win variation. When it is determined that the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. Thus, when the variation of the second special pattern is started during the big hit variation of the first special pattern, it is forced to lose regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly detaching is not limited to the one described above. For example, in step 052IWS57B, when the first special symbol is in the middle of a big hit fluctuation, a process of setting a random number (fixed value) as a hit determination random number is performed, and by moving to step 052IWS59B, any time at the time of start winning Regardless of whether or not the random number for the hit determination has been obtained, the game may be forcibly lost.

Further, for example, when the first special symbol is in the middle of the big hit fluctuation at step 052IWS57B, the process of steps 052IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random value (fixed value) is set as the random number for hit determination, and a small value is set. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly lost regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

If the first special symbols are not fluctuating in the jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The big-hit determination module is a program that determines that a big-hit will be made when the hit-judgment random number matches a predetermined big-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big win (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big win flag indicating that a big win will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). . Based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), go to step 052 IWS69B.

Further, when the game control microcomputer 100 does not make a big hit at step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small-hit determination module is a program that determines a small-hit if the random number for the hit determination (random number for the small-hit determination may be used) matches a predetermined small-hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that the small win is to be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol ( step 052 IWS 66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the minor winning type based on the winning type determination random number (step 052IWS67B), and stores the minor winning type (step 052IWS68B). Incidentally, in this example, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type is determined as the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 052IWS75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base frequency counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 052IWS72B) and shortens the variable display of the special symbols. Reset the special figure time saving flag indicating that it is under control (step 052IWS73B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbols to be stopped are determined immediately before step 052IWS75B.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability-variable big-hit determination table or the probability-variable big-hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process will be described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, non-shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and depending on the number of variations, variation Select one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I) as the variation pattern table for determining the pattern. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / if the 1st KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) Select, if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), and if it is the 50th variation, the second Select the special symbol variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/1st KT state), the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) if the first variation The pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
FIG. 10-22 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the role product control process flag indicates the normal role product control process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). In addition, when the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the normal role control process (step S120), that is, when the value of the role product control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value indicating the end processing (step S128) is not reached, and the case is neither during the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small winning game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). be.

If the value of the role product control process flag is a value indicating the role product control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103, if not yet transmitted, determines whether or not to make a big hit, and the type of the big win. Based on the determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052 IWS 1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying the jackpot symbol (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing, It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set.

If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the small winning symbol (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. If the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the small winning symbol, the process is terminated as it is.

If the first special symbol display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small winning symbol, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big winning (step 052IWS1127B). . It should be noted that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol being executed will result in a big win can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second big win flag is set. If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit (step 052IWS1128B). . Whether or not it is a 10R variable probability big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 2R probability variable big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the type of big win stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the process is terminated as it is.

When the first special symbol display device 4A derives and displays the jackpot pattern (Y of step 052IWS1125B), or when the minor hit pattern is derived and displayed (Y of step 052IWS1126B), the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and When the variable display of the second special symbol that does not result in any of the 2R probability variable jackpots (that is, the 2R normal jackpots) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120. to transmit the second compulsory pattern confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, or when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol that results in a normal jackpot (in this example, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is displayed. A situation in which a big hit or a small hit occurs simultaneously with the second special symbol is prevented. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the second special symbol variation display is forced out, the decoration symbol variation is based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a result of the display, control is performed so as to forcibly stop and display the lost pattern.

In addition, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Or 2R probability variation big hit), when the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the second special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbols has become a small win, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, step 052IWS1120B is determined as N, steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B are skipped, and step 052IWS1122B does not update the second variable time timer. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a probability variable big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small winning game. is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, it is a case where the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit. Even if there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol results in a small win and the variation display of the second special symbol that results in a loss or a small win is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small win game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and the small winning game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

By constructing as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be digested, and the occurrence of a big hit at unintended timing when the player is absent. can be suppressed.

In addition, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol ( A game machine configured to provide a starting winning hole which is not a variable winning ball device, and configured to shift to a normal state via a time-saving state of a first special symbol after the end of a second KT state (small winning RUSH). , As described above, a configuration may be applied in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out. In this case, since the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol also increases. To further suppress the occurrence of a big win at an unintended timing in the absence of a player by increasing the frequency of playing, suppressing the occurrence of the variable display of the second special pattern based on the second reserved memory in the normal state. can be done.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory design decision designation command is sent in step 052IWS1129B of the second special design variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the second special design is forced as a stop design. Derivation and display of the target missing pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is achieved in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big win game. , and the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N of step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the 2nd small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start specification command vis-a-vis production control CPU120 is done (step 052IWS2021B). Also, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hitting indicator 26 (step 052 IWS 2024 B), and the right for the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small winning game. Advantageously, the hit right indicator 26 is lit.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be on during the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination processing of step 052IWS2023B, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is overlapped and started. or a right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Accessory control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flow chart showing a role product control normal process (step S120) in the role product control process process. In the role product control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the jackpot type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot to "1". ' is set (step 052 IWS 2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting process)
FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the role product control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the process is terminated. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability variation flag, high base flag, special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( step 052 IWS 2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, the passage gate 41 is played instead of immediately starting the jackpot game when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second special pattern by executing the gate passage waiting process. On the condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flow chart showing the process during jackpot opening (step S123) in the role product control process process. In the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is on (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has entered the large winning opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening. The counter value is incremented by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is on (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in an ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052 IWS 2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y at step 052IWS2406) or when the opening time timer times out (Y at step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door. It stops and controls the big winning opening to be closed (step 052IWS2409). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after the opening of the big winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Also, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (step 052IWS2412).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the role product control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the big win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the big win end display timer to display time corresponding to the time (big win end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5. A value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

At step 052IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V prize flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the variable probability flag, and shifts to the variable probability state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not the 10R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets a special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set. probability/second KT state).

If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS2209). It should be noted that whether or not the 6R probability variable big hit can be determined by confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process and step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process, for example. If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variable jackpot, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variation display, It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big win occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special figure time saving flag. to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Also, the CPU 103 sets the high base number counter to "50" (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process moves to step 052 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 052IWS2215).

(small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flow chart showing a small winning end process (step S128) in the role product control process process. In the small-hit end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small-hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and when the small-hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small-hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 causes the small-hit end display timer to display corresponding to the time during which the small-hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small-hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

At step 052IWS2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small-hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the small hit end display time has passed (Y of step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052 IWS 2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the lighting of the right hand indicator 26 is started at the start of the small winning game (steps 052IWS2023B-S2025B). ), the processing of steps 052 IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, and the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small winning game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the role product control process flag to a value corresponding to the normal role product control process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in this characteristic portion 052IW. First, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the low-probability/low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in a low probability/low base state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win or a 6R normal big win mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, a high probability/ It shifts to a low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/ 1KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, the transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and whether the next jackpot will occur. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until 50 fluctuation displays are completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After transitioning to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this characteristic portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. to perform the shooting operation (right hitting) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big win occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variable big win, a 6R probability variable big win, a 2R probability variable big win, or a 2R normal big win occurs mainly.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R variable probability big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. / high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variable jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so once high probability / high When the base state is reached, the high probability/high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. / high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once in the low-probability/high-base state, the low-probability/high-base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal jackpot or 2R normal jackpot occurs and the low probability/high base state is reached, if 50 times of fluctuation display ends without the next jackpot As shown, it shifts to the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A-S73A, S69B-S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big win occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 10R probability variable big hit or the 2R probability variable big hit is 15 when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. % (see FIGS. 10-5(D) and (E)), once the high-probability/low-base state is reached, the high-probability/low-base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a big win game, a high probability is reached after the end of the big win game. / high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204-S2206, S2209-S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), the state shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. , the low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described, but the second special symbol changes at a low rate It is also possible that a display is performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable big hit or a 2R probability variable big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big win game, the transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is made. become. Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low-probability/high base state (low-probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low-probability/high probability The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), and until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, the low probability/high probability is reached. The base state will be maintained.

Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. may be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variable jackpot occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/1st KT state), until the next jackpot occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process processing (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flow chart showing an example of normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113).

In this characteristic part 052IW, the processing of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed, and when passage of a game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, a gate passage specification command is transmitted. In this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Regardless of whether or not the gate passage specification command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of whether or not the state is waiting for passage through the gate, when passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 052IWS5113 is executed. Variation display of normal symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not waiting for passage of the gate, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed, and in the state of waiting for passage of the gate, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbols are displayed. may be configured so as not to execute the variable display.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal starting area and the operating area. Since it is executed prior to the symbol process processing (see step S26), the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the normal start region is detected after the detection processing of the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41 as the operating region. A detection process is performed. Therefore, the processing for starting the big win game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 sets the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) to the maximum value (in this example, " 4”) is reached. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the normal figure holding indicator 25C is lit according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 extracts the value of the normal symbol per determination random number and stores it in a storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passage memory number.

Normal design normal processing (step 052IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal design can be started (for example, when the value of the normal design process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal design When the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the opening/closing operation based on the fact that the normal symbol is not variably displayed on the display device 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed by hitting the normal symbol display device 20), the gate passage is stored. Check the value of a number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is to be a winning pattern). Then, the normal pattern process timer is set for the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to the value (specifically "1") indicating the design variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 052 IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "2") indicating the design stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop process (step 052 IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. If it is not a hit pattern (if it is a lost pattern), the value of the normal design process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a hit pattern, the time before opening the normal electric accessary product is set to the normal pattern process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "3") indicating normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103).

Ordinary electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and sets the timer. to start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "4") indicating normal electric auditors product operation processing (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessary product operation processing (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal design process flag is normally updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating normal design processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the number of gate passage memories is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passages stored is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N of step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol per judgment random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing storage number counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random number value for determining per normal symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing storage number = n-1 Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for judging normal symbols stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 order. are designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 performs lottery processing based on random numbers (random number values for normal symbol hit determination) using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not normal symbol hits are determined, and whether or not normal symbol hits are determined. (Step 052IWS5127). In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly determines whether the variable probability state, KT state, or high base state is 99/100. It is determined to be a normal pattern per probability.

At step 052IWS5127, if the read normal symbol winning determination random number value is within the winning range (if it is a winning), the CPU 103 sets a winning symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. In step 052IWS5127, if the read normal symbol hit determination random number value is not within the winning range (if it is a loss), the CPU 103 sets a losing symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

At step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds to the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (Y at step 052IWS5130, S5131). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal design process timer as the normal design fluctuation time (N of step 052 IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically "1") indicating normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal symbol process timer (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 052IWS3702), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the normal symbol stop symbol is a winning symbol (step 052IWS5127). (step 052IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop pattern of the normal pattern is a winning pattern can be confirmed by checking whether or not the flag is set by, for example, setting a normal pattern hitting determination flag when it is determined to be a winning at step 052IWS5127. can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a losing symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

At step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y at step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). .

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "3") corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening preprocessing)
FIG. 10-33 is a flow chart showing normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessary product opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 normally -1 the value of the symbol process timer (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052 IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

When the normal pattern process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has passed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , When it is set, that is, when it is in the 1st KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessary product opening time (step 052IWS3805). Also, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this characteristic part 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the 1st KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the 2nd KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to start and win in the second start winning port than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

Incidentally, when the gaming state is the first KT state, the method of control for making it easier to start winning in the second start winning opening is not limited to the one shown in this characteristic portion 052IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device The number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to 2 times in the first KT state, while the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to 1 time. By doing so, in the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to make it easier to start winning in the second starting winning hole.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the above-described control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of openings of .

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically "4") corresponding to the normal electric accessary product operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received production control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), the production control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620 ).

If the received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination designation command, second design determination designation command, first forced design determination designation command, second forced design determination designation command) (step 052IWS621 ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the first compulsory determination command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the second compulsory determination command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the jackpot game, it may be configured to execute a set value suggestion effect that suggests the current set value. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display is normally started in the display color of white. If the set value is "2", start right-handed display in green color at a relatively high rate, or start right-handed display in green color at a relatively high rate , when the set value is "3", the yellow display color starts right-handed display at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "4", the orange display color is started at a relatively high rate. If the setting value is "5", the display color of red is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "6", the rate is relatively high. Right-handed display of rainbow display colors may be started.

Further, for example, the right-hand hitting display is configured to continue to be executed even during the KT state after the end of the big win game, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-hand hitting display is changed and set at the timing of the end of the big win game. It may be configured to execute a value suggesting presentation.

Further, for example, when the change display of 50 times is completed in the low probability/1st KT state and the transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is made, the left-handed display is started, and the left-handed display is configured. The setting value suggestion effect may be executed by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the display. When the control of the game state is switched in some form, the setting value suggesting effect may be executed.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command during the opening of the big winning hole (step 052IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 determines the winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big winning hole during the round of the big win game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a large winning opening open flag that designates that the large winning opening is being opened (in the round period during the big winning game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening open display command (the timing of starting the round), so it is extremely rare. Also when over winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after the opening of the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is the interval period after opening the large winning opening. (step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed informing LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed informing LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low-probability/non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low-probability/non-KT state (for example, A blue background image) is controlled (step 052IWS643). Also, if the effect control CPU 120 is set, it resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the big winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, during the jackpot game (except during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot), the game ball enters the big win port, or the game ball enters the special win port during the high probability/second KT state. When a ball wins, the value of the winning ball counter is cumulatively updated (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but by executing the process of step 052IWS645, the gaming state is low probability/ The value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the low probability/low base state is reached after 50 fluctuation displays are completed after the high base state (low probability/1st KT state).

If the received effect control command is a low probability/first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/first KT state (for example, A green background image) is controlled (step 052IWS647). In addition, the effect control CPU120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if it is set, a high probability state flag indicating a high probability state and a second KT state flag indicating a second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/first KT background designation command (step 052 IWS 650), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, A yellow background image) is displayed (step 052 IWS 651). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high probability/second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 changes the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability/second KT state (for example, A red background image) is controlled (step 052 IWS 655). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big win game based on the 10R probability variable big hit, the 6R probability variable big win, or the 6R normal big win is in progress. (step 052IWS659). Whether or not the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is in progress can be determined, for example, if the value of the production control process flag is during the jackpot production process (step S176) to the ending production process (step S177). ) and confirms whether the display result designation commands stored in the display result designation command storage area are display result 2 designation commands to display result 4 designation commands. can be determined by

During the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the winning ball counter (step 052IWS660). Also, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 052IWS661). The display of the number of prize balls is a display of the accumulated number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the big winning opening and the special winning opening during the jackpot game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS658 to S661, in this example, a prize ball is entered into a big winning opening during a big winning game based on a 10R variable probability big win, a 6R probability variable big win, or a 6R normal big win. The value of the number counter and the ball number display are updated. On the other hand, even during the jackpot game, if a prize is won in the jackpot during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated and the prize ball counter is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over winning suggestive effect process for determining and executing an over winning suggestive effect (step 052IWS662). Note that the "over-winning effect suggesting effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when an over-winning to the big winning hole occurs, and suggests the currently set set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing a prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, the "suggestion of the number of prize balls display" is based on the number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening or special prize opening during the jackpot game or high probability / 2nd KT state. This effect is executed when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, suggesting the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes prize ball number emphasizing effect processing for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In addition, the "prize number emphasizing effect" is based on the fact that the number of prize balls paid out based on winning a big prize opening or special prize opening during a big win game or a high probability / 2nd KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000) is emphasized.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the number-of-balls counter (step 052IWS667). Also, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the counter for the number of prize balls after addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS665 to S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize balls are generated based on the occurrence of a small hit in the high probability/second KT state and the prize winning to the special prize opening. Number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special winning prize occurs during the high probability/1st KT state or low probability/1st KT state, the value of the winning balls counter is not updated. The display of the number of prize balls is also not updated (however, the value of the counter of the number of prize balls is not updated, and the value of the counter of the number of prize balls is not reset).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a small-hit winning suggestion performance process for determining and executing a small-hit winning suggestion performance (step 052IWS669). It should be noted that the "suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize" is executed at the timing when a small win occurs during the high probability / 2nd KT state and a special prize winning opening occurs, and is a production that suggests the currently set setting value. .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 052IWS663, and executes the number-of-balls display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command, or executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 052 IWS 670 ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS611.

(Suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flow chart showing the over winning suggestive effect process (step 052IWS662). In the over winning suggestive effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning prize number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the number-of-wins counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-win to the big-win opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of over-win suggesting effect. Lottery processing based on random numbers is performed using the over-winning suggestive effect determination table (step 052 IWS 303) to determine the presence and type of the over-win suggestive effect.

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the over-winning suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the table for determining over winning suggestive effects, there are no over winning suggesting effect, over winning suggesting effect A, over winning suggesting effect B, over winning suggesting effect C, and over winning suggesting effect C. A judgment value is assigned to each of the suggesting effect D, the suggesting effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggesting effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+15 ”) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the "over winning indication effect A" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in blue on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output a winning sound of sound A which is different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over winning indication effect B" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in green color on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound B different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. Further, when the "over winning indication effect C" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound C different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when the "over winning indication effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound D different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when the "over winning indication effect E" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in red color on the image display device 5, and the winning of the sound E different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output. In addition, when the "over winning indication effect F" is executed, the winning indication is displayed in rainbow display colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over winning suggestive effect determination table, different determination values are assigned according to which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. At step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and identifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of the suggestive effect at the time of over winning is determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestive effect B is determined to be relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C to be determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggesting effect D is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of execution of the over winning indication effect E to be executed is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F to be determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the total of the over-winning suggestive effects A to F to determine the execution of the over-winning suggestive effects is 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value If it is "4", it is 55%, if it is a set value of "5", it is 60%, and if it is a set value of "6", it is 65%. Thus, in this example, since the over winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over winning suggesting effect is relatively high compared to the small winning suggesting effect to be described later. there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the over winning suggestive effect has been determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If execution of the over-winning suggesting effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display corresponding to the determined over-winning suggesting effect (step 052 IWS 305). . For example, if it is determined to execute the over-winning indication effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning indication in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a prize winning sound corresponding to the determined type of suggestive effect at the time of over winning from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N of step 052 IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestive effect at the time of over winning (N of step 052 IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 In step 052, control is performed to display the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting the normal winning prize sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion effect processing at the time of small hit winning)
FIG. 10-40 is a flow chart showing the hint effect processing (step 052IWS669) at the time of winning a small prize. In the small-hit winning suggestion performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a small-hit winning suggestion performance determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the small-hit winning suggestion performance. Then, the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize are determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the table for determining the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small winning prize suggesting effect determination table, there are no suggesting effect when winning a small win, suggesting effect A when winning a small win, suggesting effect B when winning a small win, suggesting effect when winning a small win. Determination values are assigned to C, suggestion performance D at the time of winning a small prize, suggestion performance E at the time of winning a small prize, and suggestion performance F at the time of winning a small prize.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball wins in the special winning hole, the winning display (in this example, "+10 ”) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the "suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. In addition, when the ``suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and a sound B different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the "minor winning prize indication effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the ``small winning winning suggestion effect D'' is executed, the winning indication is displayed in orange on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the ``suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small prize'' is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and a sound E different from the normal sound is produced from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output. In addition, when the "minor winning winning indication effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in rainbow display colors on the image display device 5, and a sound F different from the normal sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. Winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small winning prize suggesting effect determination table, different determination values are assigned according to which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. . At step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and identifies the current setting value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and type of suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. In addition, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of winning a small prize is determined is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small prize is decided is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small prize is relatively high.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggested effect at the time of winning a small hit by totaling the suggested effects A to F at the time of winning a small win is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the setting value is "2", 7% when the setting value is "3", and the setting value is "4 , 9% if the set value is "5", and 10% if the set value is "6". Thus, in this example, compared with the above-described over winning suggesting effect, the ratio of determining the execution of the small winning suggesting effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize is determined, the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a winning display corresponding to the type of the suggested effect at the time of winning a small prize determined (step 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small win winning suggestion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestive effect A at the time of winning a small prize, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize (N in step 052 IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. control is performed (step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for outputting the normal winning prize sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of setting value suggestion may be different between the case of executing the over winning suggestion performance and the case of executing the small winning prize suggestion performance. For example, the suggestive effect F at the time of over winning can be executed at any of the set values ``1'' to ``6'', but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is ``6'', whereas it is executed at a relatively high rate. It may be configured such that the setting value "6" is determined when the prize-winning suggestive effect F is executed. Conversely, for example, the suggestive effect F at the time of winning a small prize can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, the set value may be determined to be "6" if the over-winning-time suggestion effect F is executed.

In addition, in this example, in the over winning indication effect and the small winning indication indication effect, the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the winning indication is made different from normal, and a winning sound different from normal is output. Although a case of executing according to a mode is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by making only one of the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the winning display and the winning sound different from the normal mode, a suggestive effect at the time of over winning or a suggestive effect at the time of small winning is executed. It may be configured as In addition, for example, by displaying an effect display or changing the display color of the lamp or LED at the timing of the occurrence of over winning or the occurrence of winning to a special winning opening, a suggestive effect at the time of over winning or a small winning It may be configured to execute a time-suggesting effect.

(Suggestion effect processing for displaying the number of prize balls)
FIG. 10-42 is a flow chart showing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. If the value of the winning ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the winning ball number counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", the effect control CPU 120 draws lots based on random numbers using a number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect. Processing is carried out, and the presence or absence of the effect A indicating the number of prize balls is determined (step 052IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is executed, the character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "4". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. "It will be determined that it is more than that.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 052 IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first ( step 052 IWS 344). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during the big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. If the value of the winning ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the winning ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform lottery processing based on random numbers, and whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect B. is determined (step 052 IWS 346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestive effect B is executed, the character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "5". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggesting effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" "It will be determined that it is more than that.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 052 IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first ( step 052 IWS 347). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. If the value of the winning ball number counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the winning ball number counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter has reached 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current setting value is "6" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggesting effect C is executed, the character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is A setting of "6" is suggested. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls-display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, since the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is "6", if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value is "6". One thing is certain.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052 IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first ( step 052 IWS 350). In this example, 15 prize balls can be obtained if a game ball enters the big prize hole during a big win game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the special prize hole during the high probability/second KT state. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so at step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465, the prize ball Determine that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" (step 052IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. is determined (step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestive effect D is executed, the character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "4". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "4". It is determined that the above is the case.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052 IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first ( step 052 IWS 353). In this example, 15 prize balls can be obtained if a game ball enters the big prize hole during a big win game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the special prize hole during the high probability/second KT state. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560, the prize ball Determine that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" (step 052IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the set value storage area (see step 052 IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers, and determines whether or not there is a prize ball number display suggestion effect E. is determined (step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is executed, the character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is greater than or equal to "5". As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the performance E suggesting the display of the number of prize balls is executed only when the set value is equal to or greater than the set value "5", if the performance E suggesting the display of the number of prize balls is executed, the set value "5" will be displayed. It is determined that the above is the case.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 052 IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first ( step 052 IWS 356). In this example, 15 prize balls can be obtained if a game ball enters the big prize hole during a big win game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if a game ball enters the special prize hole during the high probability/second KT state. is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so at step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines that if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675, the prize ball Determine that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the current set value is "6" (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current setting value is "6" can be specifically determined by confirming the contents stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the number-of-balls display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 052 IWS 358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the number-of-balls display suggestive effect F is executed, the character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is A setting of "6" is suggested. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is "6". One thing is certain.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the award number display suggestion effect is determined in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355 and S358 (step 052IWS359). If execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the determined type of number-of-balls display suggestion effect in the image display device 5 (step 052IWS360). For example, if it is decided to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big win game, the period of the big win game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As the number of winning balls display is suggested, the execution probability decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%. 6” The accuracy of confirmation and setpoint suggestion is increased. Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed from the number of prize ball display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period of the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), during the small hit RUSH As the period becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the number of prize ball display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, and the set value The accuracy of "5" or more confirmation, setting value "6" confirmation and setting value suggestion has increased.

It should be noted that not only the mode shown in the present example, but as the period during the big win game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the presentation suggesting the number of prize balls increases. It can be configured as follows. Further, for example, as the period during the big win game or the period during the small win RUSH becomes longer and the number of winning balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the setting value may be lowered.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big win game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the period of the small win RUSH Although the execution probabilities of the number-of-balls display suggestion performance are different in the productions D to F, the performance is not limited to such a mode, and is configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion performance with the same execution probability. may

(Number of prize balls emphasizing effect processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flow chart showing the prize number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasizing effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the threshold for each 1000 (in this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 and 5000). is confirmed (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball enters the big winning hole during a big win game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Also, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 5000 first.

If the value of the number-of-balls counter first reaches the threshold for each 1000, the effect control CPU 120 uses a number-of-balls-number-emphasizing effect determination table for determining whether or not to emphasize the number-of-balls-winning effect, and generates a random number. A lottery process based on the above is performed, and the presence or absence of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect is determined (step 052IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the number-of-balls emphasis effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 1000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize number emphasizing effect A is executed, the character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. - 特許庁Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 2000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "2000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 3000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "3000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 4000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize number emphasizing effect D is executed, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "4000 OVER". Further, in this example, when the value of the number-of-balls counter reaches 5000, execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is executed, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "5000 OVER".

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not execution of the prize number emphasizing effect has been determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the number-of-balls emphasizing effect of the determined type (step 052IWS374). For example, if execution of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect A is determined, the image display device 5 is controlled to display characters such as "1000 OVER".

In addition, in this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, 3,000, 4,000, and 5,000, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to modes. For example, it is possible to execute the prize number emphasizing effect when the number of prize balls reaches 1,000, 2,000, and 3,000, not necessarily in all cases. may be configured. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the number-of-prize-balls emphasizing effect may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the number-of-balls emphasizing effect is irrelevant to the current set value, unlike the number-of-balls display suggesting effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43. It is a production that is determined and executed. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a mode, for example, by changing the display mode of the number-of-balls emphasizing effect, the number-of-balls-number-emphasizing effect may be executed in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, by displaying characters such as "1000 OVER" and "2000 OVER" in a display color different from usual, the current set value may be suggested.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flow chart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command is received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). Then, at step 052 IWS 811, it may be confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is time to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the first special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 052 IWS 814). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command designates the second variation pattern #01 to #34 It can be determined by checking whether If the variable display of the second special symbol is not to be executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the non-KT state, the variable display of the decoration design is performed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the first special design. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative design is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, if the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed (step 052IWS920). It should be noted that whether or not it is a case of executing the variation display of the first special symbol, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area designates the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. In the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of this time is for a small hit (step 052IWS921). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of this time is a small win is determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a display result 7 designation command. can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach losing symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small win is achieved, there is only a case where the small win A is achieved, and the game ball is moved to the special winning opening during the small win game. can hardly be expected to win the prize. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed and becomes a small hit, the non-reach losing symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N of step 052IWS920) or when it is not a small hit variation (N of step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the result of the variation display. is determined (step 052IWS923). At step 052 IWS 923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be lost), the effect control CPU 120 has only the left, middle, right decorative patterns that are completely unmatched, or only the left and right decorative patterns. A combination of matching reach-losing symbols is determined. When a display result 2 designating command is received (when a 10R probability variable big hit is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are odd number patterns and are aligned with the pattern '7' is determined. When a display result 3 designating command is received (when 6R probability variable big hit is determined), a combination of patterns in which left, middle and right decoration patterns are odd number patterns other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined), the combination of patterns including the special pattern (in this example, the pattern "R") is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot is determined), a pattern combination in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are even-numbered patterns. to decide. Also, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined as a small hit), a combination of decoration designs of a small hit design (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change display of this time is a loss (step 052IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of this time is a failure can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. can be determined by If it is not an outlier change, the process proceeds directly to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation change (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggesting effect setting process for determining the presence or absence and type of a set value suggesting effect suggesting the currently set value. (Step 052 IWS 925).

At step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggesting effect determination table for determining the presence or absence and type of the setting value suggesting effect, and sets. Determines the presence and type of value suggestive rendering.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, there are set value suggesting effect none, set value suggesting effect A, set value suggesting effect B, setting value suggesting effect C, setting value suggesting effect D, set value Judgment values are assigned to the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F, respectively.

The setting value suggesting effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Highest execution rate in some cases. Further, the setting value suggesting effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Further, the setting value suggesting effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Also, the set value suggesting effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Also, the setting value suggesting effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. , the execution ratio is the highest. Further, the setting value suggesting effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in rainbow display colors on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-48, the setting value " 6” has the highest execution ratio.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the 2KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the 2KT state), the process proceeds directly to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y of step 052IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is a small hit RUSH suggesting that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined respectively. value is assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5 . Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5 .

As shown in FIG. 10-49, in this example, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect when the setting value is "2" When the execution ratio is the next highest, and the set value is "3", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest, and when the set value is "4", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance. is the next highest, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the next highest when the set value is “5”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is the highest when the set value is “6”. getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B when the setting value is "6". has the highest execution ratio.

In this example, the probability of a big hit is lowest when the set value is "1" and the probability of a big hit is highest when the set value is "6". Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of expectation for continuation is high), and the setting value "6" It can be said that the setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low) is the case where there is. Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small winning RUSH continuation suggestion performance, it is possible to heighten expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small winning RUSH).

As described above, the degree of expectation for continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will become longer without the occurrence of a big win.

Further, in this example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", especially by executing the small win RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, It is possible to further increase expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, when determining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect , selects the process table corresponding to the setting value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected at step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 052 IWS 930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the LED control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Incidentally, when it is decided to execute the set value suggesting effect, step 052 IWS 930 and the effect processing during variable display (step S 172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggesting effect selected in step 052 IWS 928. The setting value suggesting effect is executed while the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner (during the deviation variation).

In addition, when execution of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is decided, according to the process table which includes the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production which is selected with step 052IWS928, step 052IWS930 and production processing during variable display (step S172) is executed. By doing so, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion performance is executed during the variable display of the decoration pattern (during the deviation variation during the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time to the decoration design variation time timer and starts the decoration design variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-50 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the decoration symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052 IWS8107). If the first symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set). is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is set in step 052 IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the 2 confirms whether or not the definite command reception flag is set (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set). is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second compulsory design determination designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing to replace the stop design of the decorative design determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with the lost design (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

When the first compulsory design determination designation command is not received at step 052IWS8108, or when the second compulsory design determination designation command is not received at step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration design fluctuation time timer. has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as already explained, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed. During the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Further, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit, and when the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, is being executed, during the small winning game. , the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration design variation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any design confirmation designation command means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 052 IWS8116 and S8117, the effect is switched to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is resumed, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. Note that the "standby effect" is, for example, a temporary stop state effect in which the left, middle, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are shaken or slightly fluctuated.

It should be noted that, for example, in the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small pattern or the fourth pattern is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. Then, when the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The variable display is also stopped.

(Waiting process per special figure)
Figures 10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 052 IWS9706. In this characterizing part 052IW, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol, a stop symbol display flag 1 is set at step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the performance during the big win is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbols have been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Without executing, go to step 052 IWS9706.

If the stop design display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop design display flag 2 indicating that the small winning design is displayed as the stop design of the decoration design is set. (Step 052 IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. In this characterizing part 052IW, when a small winning design is displayed as a stop design of the decoration design, a stop design display flag 2 is set at step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small winning. Therefore, the fact that the stop pattern display flag 2 is set means that the small winning pattern has been confirmed and displayed, but the small winning middle effect has not yet been executed. Go to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , small winning symbols) are controlled to be displayed (step 052IWS9703). In addition, when the first compulsory design confirmation designation command and the second compulsory design confirmation designation command are received and the process of replacing with the lost design is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, in step 052IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120 is the design of the lost design. is displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of winning balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of the hit that has occurred this time is the 10R variable probability jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052 IWS9709). Whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is determined, for example, by determining whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R variable probability big win, or the 6R normal big win, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of winning balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, display of the number of winning balls is started when a big win game based on the 10R variable probability big win, the 6R probability variable big win, or the 6R normal big win is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big win, when a big win game based on the 2R probability variable big win or the 2R normal big win is started, the display of the number of winning balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S176) during the big hit (step 052IWS9714).

If the jackpot pattern is not confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 052IWS9703 (N of step 052IWS9704), if the small winning pattern is confirmed and displayed in the processing of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command is received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small winning effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small winning effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

In the process of step 052IWS9703, when the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern is not displayed (that is, when the lost pattern is displayed) (N of step 052IWS9704 and N of step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending effect processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flow chart showing the ending effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). It should be noted that the effect period measuring timer is set based on the completion of all the rounds of the big win game in the effect process during the big win (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the production period measurement timer has not timed out (step 052IWS952 N), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and controls the production device (image display device 5 , game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) are executed (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect such as displaying that the big win is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to end this time is a jackpot game based on the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variable jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result designation command 3 or the display result designation command 4. can be determined by checking If it is a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS958 to S959, in this example, when executing a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variable jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the number of prize balls is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is won. The display of the number of prize balls is erased when the game is ended, and the display of the number of prize balls is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state after the end of the big win game.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to end this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of prize balls is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the display of the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start the display of the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052 IWS960 to S962, in this example, when executing a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variable jackpot, the number of prize balls is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, In this example, if the number of prize balls is displayed before the 2R probability variable jackpot is displayed, the number of prize balls is displayed continuously, but the display is not updated), high probability after the end of the jackpot game. / The number of prize balls is displayed during the second KT state.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, the effect mode of the effect executed in this characterizing portion 052IW will be described. First, the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the set value suggesting effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect in the variable display of the decorative symbols that are lost. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decoration patterns, when it comes time to execute the set value suggesting effect, FIG. 10-54 (B1 ) to (B3), the setting value suggesting effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, and 052IW003 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. A value suggesting rendition is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. Suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. , a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow color is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depends on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and whether the set value suggestion effect is executed. can give hope to

Next, the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is to be lost during the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55(A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as "small win RUSH" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is recognizably displayed that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when executing the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns in the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006 on the image display device 5. FIG. In this example, a case is shown in which racing car images are displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. Small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production is executed.

In this example, during the variable display of the decoration pattern to be lost in the second KT state, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or by displaying the effect image of any display color, the small win RUSH continuation suggestion Depending on whether or not the performance is executed, the player can have expectations for the continuation of the second KT state (small win RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right hitting information will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the notification of hitting to the right. In this example, regardless of whether the big win is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol or the big win is achieved by the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, when the jackpot game is in progress. 10-56(1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) turns on the right-handed indicator 26 (see steps 052IWS2018A, S2018B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the effect control CPU 120 displays a right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small winning game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically At this time, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit by the CPU 103 (see step 052IWS2024B). Also, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed notification LED 37 is lit by the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2025B, S639) . However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56(2), the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. The hitting notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, a description will be given of the performance aspects of the over winning suggesting effect, the small winning winning suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. FIG. 10-57 and FIG. 10-58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect modes of the over winning suggesting effect, the small winning winning suggesting effect, and the number of prize balls display suggesting effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . . Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the case of being controlled to the jackpot game state based on the 10R probability variable jackpot is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the jackpot game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Jacking!" and the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The number of prize balls display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, when a normal winning (not over winning) to the big winning opening occurs during the jackpot game, the winning is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 052IW009 (in this example, character display of "+15") is displayed, and normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-win occurs during the jackpot game, and execution of the over-win-time suggestive performance is determined based on the occurrence of the over win. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), a winning display 052IW010 (character display of "+15" in this example) corresponding to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect is displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R output a prize winning sound corresponding to the type of over winning suggestive effect determined (see steps 052, IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning effect A is executed, the image display device 5 displays the winning display in a blue display color, and the winning sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and the execution of the number of prize balls display suggesting effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In addition, in this example, the case of executing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect A is shown. OVER" is displayed, and the number-of-balls display suggestion performance B is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is determined, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect C is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the big win game ends, the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the big win game ends. Also, when it is controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in FIG. is displayed.

Next, in the high-probability/second KT state, a game ball enters the special winning hole as a small hit, but if execution of the suggestive performance at the time of small winning is not decided, see FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), a winning display 052IW012 (character display of "+10" in this example) is displayed in a normal display color (in this example, white), and a normal sound is generated from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output (see step 052IWS325, S326).

Next, a small hit occurs during the high probability/2nd KT state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole, and based on the fact that the game ball enters the special winning hole, a suggestive performance at the time of winning the small win. shall be decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), a winning display 052IW013 (in this example, character display of "+10") corresponding to the type of the determined small winning winning suggestion effect is displayed, and a speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, a prize winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small winning prize suggestive effect is output (see steps 052, IWS323 and S324). For example, in the case of executing the suggestion effect A at the time of winning a small prize, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and execution of the number of prize balls display suggesting effect F is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), the character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case of executing the number-of-balls display suggestion effect F is shown. OVER" is displayed, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is determined, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the number-of-balls display suggestion effect E is executed.

Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although illustration is omitted, for example, execution of the prize number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 1000. In this case, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2000, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "2000 OVER". , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3,000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect C is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number of prize balls emphasizing effect D is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect D is executed. Further, for example, when execution of the number of prize balls emphasizing effect E is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , the number-of-balls emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability/second KT state (Total gaming value given by the player), the case is shown in which the prize ball number display suggesting effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, according to the number of small hits occurring during the high probability/2nd KT state and the number of executions of the variable display executed during the high probability/2KT state, different selection ratios are used to indicate the number of prize balls display indications A to F. may be configured to execute, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of one special symbol results in a small hit during the variable display of the other special symbol.

During the variable display of the first special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a big hit variation such as a big hit or a 6R probability variable big hit), as shown in FIG. 10-59(A), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a normal jackpot (in this example, a 6R normal jackpot) and a jackpot variation, as shown in FIG. When the first special symbol is changed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 052IWS1128A, see step 052IWS1129A).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127A).

During the variable display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a probability variable big hit (in this example, 10R probability variable In the case of a jackpot variation such as a jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot), as shown in FIG. is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1128B).

On the other hand, if the variation display of the second special symbol is a normal jackpot (in this example, a 2R normal jackpot), as shown in FIG. When it is done, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped in the lost symbol (see step 052IWS1128B N, step 052IWS1129B).

It should be noted that, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol will be described.

(Modification 1)
10-60 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are similar to those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in modification 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. .

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1129A as it is, and transmits the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. control is performed (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-60, the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 1. FIG. In FIG. 10-61, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those processes shown in FIG. 10-22, but in modification 1, there is no determination process of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22. .

In the modified example 1, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed becomes a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1129B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. control is performed (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-61, the processing of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 1. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 10-62(A), when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern, regardless of whether the big hit variation is a normal big hit. Stopped display (N of step 052IWS1127A, see step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B), Even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-62(C), regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special pattern is also forced to be a lost pattern. Stopped display (N of step 052IWS1127B, see step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (D), The variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see N of IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 2. FIG. In FIG. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 052IWS1127C.

In modification 2, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In addition, in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 10-64, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the processing of step 052IWS1127D.

In the modification 2, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed results in a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not result in a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 2. FIG.

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes a big hit, whether the variable display of the first special pattern is a big winning variation that becomes a probability variable big win. As shown in FIG. 10-65(A), the first special symbol continues to be varied and displayed even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the first variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game ends, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1127C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that results in a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), When the small winning symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcefully stopped-displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 052IWS1127C, see step 052IWS1129A).

When the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol to be a big hit, whether the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation to be a probability variable big hit. As shown in FIG. 10-65(C), the second special symbol is continuously displayed even if the small winning symbols are stop-displayed regardless of whether or not the variation is a big hit that is a normal big hit. Specifically, during the small winning game, the updating of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small winning game is finished, the value of the role product control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the role product control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 (see Y in IWS1127D).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a loss or a small hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D), When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol (N of step 052IWS1127D, see step 052IWS1129B).

In addition, as a control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, in addition to those shown in the first and second modifications, for example, losing During the variable display of the first special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, it is forced to come off and stop, while the first special symbol to be a small winning is displayed during the variable display. In the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, when the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special pattern during the variable display of the first special pattern that becomes the 10R probability variable big hit, the second special pattern that becomes the 2R probability variable big hit is forced to come off and stop. In the case where the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Also, for example, during normal state (low probability/low base state), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is lost and fluctuates. It may be constructed so as to be stopped forcibly in either small hit variation or big hit variation. With such a configuration, in this example, when 50 fluctuation displays in the low-probability/high-base state are completed, the transition to the low-probability/low-base state is made (see FIG. 10-29). When 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated when changing to a low probability/low base state after ending the variable display, and if there is a second reserved memory that becomes a big hit among them, the game is forced to lose and stop. Thus, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second start winning port is easily started to win. It is also possible to have a capture method in which the first start winning opening is started to win and the first special symbol is displayed variably, while the second special symbol is variably displayed by the start winning. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various aspects can be conceived as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of one special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the same control is performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. A case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, but different controls are possible. FIG. 10-66 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, in the modification 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. not exist. Therefore, in Modification 3, if the first special symbol display device 4A does not derive and display the big hit symbol (N of step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when the variable display of the other special symbol results in a small win while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed in Modification 3. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in modification 3, during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59(A) and (C). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, or a probability variable big hit, the small winning symbol stops in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. When it is displayed, like FIGS. 10-59(D) and (F), even if the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67(B), in the modification 3, during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. Similarly to FIG. 10-59(B), when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a lost symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in Modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. , unlike FIG. 10-59(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-67, in modification 3, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the special symbol is forced by the missing symbol. Stop display control is different.

In the modification 3, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the game is forcibly lost and stopped, while the normal big win is achieved. While the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display is continued when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol. do not have. For example, conversely, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the variable display is continued while the normal big win is performed. It may be constructed such that when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed by the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the machine is forced to come off and stop. Also, for example, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol variation display during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big hit or a normal big hit), the forced loss is performed. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol which is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variable big win or a normal big win), it fluctuates. The display may be configured to continue. As such, in some form, the control for the forced dropout stop may be different between when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 10-68, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A-S1128A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 determines that the probability variable flag is It is checked whether or not it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, The variable display of the first special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the first special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, is not in the probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-69 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. FIG. In FIG. 10-69, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B-S1128B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In modification 4, in step 052IWS1128B, when the variable display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, nor the 2R probability variable jackpot (that is, the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the probability variation state is not set), the process is terminated as it is. If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second compulsory design confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). The processing of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modification 4, by executing the determination processing of step 052IWS1131B, during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special pattern is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern, but the variable display of the second special pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost pattern in the probability variable state. On the other hand, even during variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit, if the probability variable state is not in effect, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed.

It should be noted that, in the modification 4, whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not the probability variation state) was forcibly removed depending on whether the stop display in the pattern was shown, but only such an aspect can't For example, depending on whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set, it may be configured to forcibly stop and display the lost symbol. Further, for example, only when the high probability/low base state (high probability flag is ON, high base flag is OFF), control may be performed to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols. In some form, it may be configured so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the lost symbols according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, in the case of performing control to forcibly stop and display the losing pattern only in the high probability/low base state, the variable display of one identification information prevents the normal big hit, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player can be set. be. In addition, it is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and a game is played according to the special state. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is likely to be given. Then, in response to the passage of the game medium (eg, game ball) through the specific area (eg, special winning hole), it is possible to execute a setting suggestive effect (eg, when winning a small prize). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special winning hole during the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH), it is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small winning. However, since the frequency of winning the special winning opening is particularly high during the small winning RUSH, it is possible to draw attention to the set suggesting performance (in this example, the suggesting performance at the time of winning the small winning), and to improve the interest of the setting suggesting performance. be able to.

In addition, in this example, a case was shown in which a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has won a special winning hole as a specific area, but such a mode not limited to For example, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect based on the winning of a game ball to a starting winning hole (ball winning device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), a general winning hole 10, or a big winning hole as a specific area. good. Moreover, it may be configured such that the setting suggesting effect can be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the out port as the specific area. Further, for example, it may be configured to be able to execute the setting suggesting effect based on the game ball passing through the gates such as the passage gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small win game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and a game is played according to the special state. It can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which value is likely to be given. In addition, it is possible to execute a setting suggesting effect (for example, a prize ball number display suggesting effect), and the ease with which the setting suggesting effect is executed varies depending on the length of the period during which the special state is controlled (for example, FIG. 10-43 , when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball display suggestion effect A can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, there is a probability of 2%. A number display suggesting performance B can be executed, when the number of prize balls reaches 666, a prize ball number display suggestion performance C can be executed with a probability of 1%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5. The number of prize balls display suggestion performance D can be executed with a probability of 3%, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the number of prize balls display suggestion performance E can be executed with a probability of 3%, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number of balls reaches 1, it is possible to execute the number-of-balls display suggesting effect F with a probability of 2%). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666 (in other words, Although a case is shown in which the number-of-balls display suggestion effect is executed during a period until a certain game value is awarded, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the jackpot game state), and the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period in which the

Also, when using the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare of the jackpot game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the jackpot game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game, the higher the percentage of the number-of-balls display suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, for example, in the case of a big win with a small number of rounds during the big win game, it may be constructed such that the number of prize balls display suggesting effect is executed at a higher rate than in the case of a big win with a large number of rounds.

Also, for example, as the "length of the period controlled in the special state", the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / 2nd KT state, and the number of times of execution of the variable display executed during the high probability / 2nd KT state Accordingly, it may be configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effect. In this case, for example, the higher the number of small wins, the higher the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed, or the higher the number of executions of variable display, the higher the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed. . Also, for example, at the timing when the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, the number of prize balls display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate. can be considered.

Generally, in a game machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXX OVER" is displayed, the number of prize balls emphasized "1000 OVER" or "1000 OVER" is displayed. It is displayed in units with a certain limit, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the presentation indicating the number of prize balls shown in the present example is performed at timings different from normal, such as when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555 and 2666. Therefore, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the performance suggesting display of the number of prize balls, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state). In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, it becomes a small hit during the high probability / 2 KT state and the game ball wins the special winning opening Based on what has been done, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

It should be noted that, in this example, the setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize, a display suggestion effect for the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the special winning hole. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be constructed such that the setting suggesting effect is executed at the start of the small winning game during the fluctuation of the small winning or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state. Further, for example, by changing the mode of notification of a small hit when a small hit occurs, the setting suggesting effect may be executed. As long as it executes the setting suggestion effect in some form in response to the control to the small hit.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when the control is in the advantageous state and when the control is in the special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is played. A medium (eg, game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (eg, open state) and a non-easy-to-enter state (eg, closed state) in which it is difficult or impossible to enter. In addition, in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened, Based on the fact that a game ball has entered a winning hole or a special winning hole, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize, a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that a game ball has won in a big winning hole or a special winning hole. is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the opening performance is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion performance is executed by changing the performance mode of the opening performance. It may be configured as In some form, the setting suggesting effect may be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the jackpot game, when transitioning from the low probability / 1st KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state) ), it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (eg, change the display mode (eg, display color) of the right-handed display at step 052 IWS 624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggesting effect in relation to the switching of control of the game state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set when the jackpot game starts or ends, or when the low probability/first KT state shifts to the normal state (low probability/low base state). Although the case where the suggestive effect is configured to be executable is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a production period when shifting to a big win game during a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH), or a shift from a big win game to a high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable during the time effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH) based on the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays during the high base state or the occurrence of a predetermined number of small wins. , in the production period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion production may be configured to be executable. can be considered.

Also, in this example, the case where the setting suggesting effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, by changing the performance modes of the fanfare performance at the start of the big win and the ending performance at the end of the big win, the setting suggestion performance may be executed, and various modes are conceivable.

Further, according to this characteristic part 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of times of execution of the variable display during the special state, It is possible to execute setting suggestion effects with different selection ratios (for example, depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666, prizes with different selection ratios Executes ball number display suggestion effects A to F. Or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state, or the number of times of execution of variable display that is executed during the high probability/second KT state , may be configured to execute the number-of-balls display suggestion effects A to F at different selection ratios.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total game value, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

Further, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, the special states include an advantageous special state (eg, the second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (eg, the first KT state) that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the advantageous special state. can be controlled to In addition, when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state, it is possible to execute the setting suggesting effects at different selection ratios (for example, Only when a game ball enters a special winning hole as a small win during the second KT state, a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small win and a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, only when a game ball wins a prize in a special winning hole during the second KT state, a case is shown in which the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small prize or the suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, even when a game ball enters the special winning hole during the 1st KT state, it is configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls, and a game ball enters the special winning hole during the 2KT state. Winning a prize or a game ball entering a special prize winning opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small win or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls at a different rate. may be configured. In addition, for example, even if an irregular winning of a game ball into a special winning hole occurs during a non-KT state, it may be configured to be able to execute a suggesting effect at the time of winning a small prize or a suggesting effect of displaying the number of prize balls. .

In the above configuration, if a special winning slot or irregular winning occurs during the 1st KT state (high base state), if a special winning slot occurs during the 2nd KT state Compared to , it may be configured to execute the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small win or the suggestion effect to display the number of prize balls at a high rate, or the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small win or the suggestion effect to display the number of prize balls at a low rate. can be configured to run.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, during the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variable jackpot, the 6R probability variable jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot, the value of the prize ball number counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R variable hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state) (however, In principle, the display of the number of prize balls is hidden, and in the low probability / 1st KT state, 50 times of fluctuation display is completed and it returns to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where control is performed to reset the value of the number-of-balls counter when shifting is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the number-of-balls counter may be updated during a big-hit game based on the 2R variable probability big-hit or the 2R normal big-hit.

In addition, in this example, by being configured as described above, for example, high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state), the 10R variable probability big hit or the 2R variable probability big hit occurs during the high base state, and if it shifts to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize during the previous small win RUSH. While the number of balls is inherited, the value of the number of prize balls counter can be updated and the display of the number of prize balls can be displayed.

In addition, not only the display of the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the 10R probability variable jackpot is shifted to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability/second KT state It may be configured such that the number of prize balls in the section is counted during (small hit RUSH) and the big hit game just before that, and the counted value is displayed. Further, for example, by changing the display mode (in this example, the display color) of the aggregated value, a setting suggestion rendering that suggests the current setting value may be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as a "setting suggesting effect", the present set value suggests any of the set values "1" to "6". Although the case of executing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of suggesting the current setting value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a mode of suggesting whether or not a setting change has been made to change the setting value when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. good. In this way, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any format that suggests settings.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (eg, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (eg, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player, and the display result of the variable display is a special display result. When a display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern). The degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to the probability variable state after the jackpot game ends). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the first specific display result, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, the first special symbol or the second 2 The variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). Also, during the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information is derived and displayed, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a lost design) (for example, the variable display of the first special design or the second special design is a lost design. is forcibly stopped). Therefore, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, in spite of the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variable state, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining retention of one identification information becomes a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot), The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or variable probability state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining retention of the identification information on one side is forcibly stopped and displayed (forcibly lost), even if the variable display is a probability variable big hit, it will be forced to be lost. As a result, the game value given to the player in an advantageous state (jackpot game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature part 052IW, while forcing the variation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) to be a target, for the variation display that is a probability variation jackpot, the variation is extended (interrupts the measurement of the variation time). , while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as a mode of "not stopping the variable display of one identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Although the case of continuously executing is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the suspended variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small winning game. may As long as it does not completely stop the variable display in some form, it is acceptable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which game value (for example, prize balls) is likely to be given in the special state. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be given due to the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, based on the derivation display of the first specific display result, control is performed to the specific state (for example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game based on the variable probability big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on that, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to implement control considering whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, it is possible to control to a specific state based on the game medium (eg, game ball) passing through the specific region (eg, V region 052IW104) while being controlled to be in an advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, game media pass through the specific region at a higher rate when controlled in an advantageous state compared to when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Figures 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to implement control considering whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed in both cases of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the execution of the variable display of the second identification information ( Figures 10-3 and 10-4). Also, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information, based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the first identification Variable display of information is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is not controlled to derive and display the variable display of a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is performed.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable variable state))). Further, the variable display executing means performs variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when being controlled to the specific state. During the execution of, based on the fact that a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68, 10- 69). Further, when being controlled to the non-specified state, during variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information corresponding to the result of the second specific display, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that takes into consideration whether or not the control is in a specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the entry of the game medium (for example, the game ball) into the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the game medium entering the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. In addition, a variable means (for example, a special variable winning A ball device 17) is provided. In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a special state that is less advantageous than the advantageous state) For example, it can be controlled to either a small winning game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves along a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths in which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is one of the movement paths. A game medium that moves along a specific path (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) for promoting the shooting of game media to a specific path, and variable display of the first identification information is executed, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to make an appropriate notification about the acceleration of the shooting of game media.

Specifically, as shown in the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the side of the first special symbol can be executed in parallel. is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning port is lower than the small winning type on the side of the second special symbol, and when the small winning occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When the variable display of the symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning percentage (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable that the player hits the game balls in vain even though the player can hardly expect to win a prize in the special prize winning opening, and rather disadvantageous launch promotion notification is given. Therefore, in this example, while executing the right-handed notification for the small hit on the second special symbol side, by not executing the right-handed notification for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the first reservation storage means (for example, the first reservation storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a reservation storage, and the variable display of the second identification information a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to as reserved storage. Further, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is entered. In addition to being controllable, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, Small hit game state) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Further, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the reserved memory can be consumed smoothly.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when it is controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of game balls to the special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on the winning of game balls into the big winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification It is possible to execute a second specific notification (for example, display of right-handed hitting display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)). Also, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is controlled to the special state. 10-56(2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the control is performed to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is performed, it is more advantageous than when the control is performed to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is performed. It is controlled to a special state with a low degree (for example, a small hit A). Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decoration pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained , forcibly stop and display non-reach out-of-order symbols). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of the control to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, it is possible to smoothly digest the reserved memory stored in the second reserved storage means.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, the regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed in the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the attack countermeasures against the gaming machine.

Note that the delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, a passage member is provided as a delay means for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. You may

In addition, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and the effect based on the information from the game control means Controlling effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) is provided. In addition, the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) that performs predetermined notification. Moreover, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the right hitting notification is executed during the big win game. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning hole) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning hole) is also provided on the right side of the game area. When a big win is achieved by the variation display of the pattern, the left big prize winning port is opened during the big win game, and when a big win is achieved by the variation display of the second special pattern, the right big prize winning port is opened during the big win game. When applied to a gaming machine configured as above, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol, while executing the right-handed notification during the big win game, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. It may be configured not to execute the right hitting notification during the big winning game when the big winning is achieved. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when a big win is achieved in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be constituted so as to execute left-handed information during the big win game. In other words, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right big winning hole) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the first special symbol, the player is prevented from erroneously performing a right-handed operation by executing a left-handed notice during the big-hit game. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

In addition, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even during the KT state is shown, but such a case is shown. It is not limited to any form. For example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the second start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, it is configured not to execute the right-handed notification during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. good too.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting indicator 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 only during the jackpot game, the right hitting indication 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right hitting notification. Although the case where it does is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even during the second KT state (during the small winning RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big winning game, in addition to the lighting of the right hitting display 26 and the right hitting notification LED 37 It is also possible to display a right-hand hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby executing the right-hand hitting notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the jackpot game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. You may comprise so that right-handed information may be performed by .

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. By, you may comprise right-handed information so that it can be performed.

In addition, the way of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball devices (special winning openings) to be opened are different depending on the type of the small win, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates the small win. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different between the case of becoming and the case of becoming a small hit by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small winning type released by the special variable winning ball device with a small number of winning balls (or the small winning type with an open mode with a low winning rate) is likely to be selected. , when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small winning type opened by the special variable winning ball device with a large number of winning balls (or the small winning type of the open mode with a high winning rate) is likely to be selected. can be configured to

In addition, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, right-handed notification is performed during the small winning game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the case where the right hitting notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)) is shown, but when a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol It may be configured so that there is a case where the right-handed information is not performed even in the case. For example, in a normal state and in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the right-handed information is not given during the small-hit game. You may

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, it is controllable to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the setting value, and is common when being controlled to a non-specific state and when being controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10 -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the set values change the lottery probability and type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball output performance) depending on the set value will become too noticeable, and gambling will increase excessively. There is Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the setting value (small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the setting value. This prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and can be executed in parallel). In addition, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of special display results (for example, small winning symbols). Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the special states are a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) that is more advantageous than the first special state. Controllable. Therefore, in a game machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate playability.

In addition, according to this characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestive effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

In addition, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, a predetermined display result (eg, winning pattern) different from the specific display result (eg, big hit pattern) and the special display result (eg, small winning pattern) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a setting value suggesting effect (eg, the setting value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-54) that suggests a setting value. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, the case where the small winning RUSH continuation suggestive effect and the set value suggestive effect are executed in the variation display of losing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute a small winning RUSH continuation suggesting effect or a set value suggesting effect during the big winning game or the small winning game, and various aspects are conceivable.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Also, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the small hit type is distributed in common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. It prevents it from becoming large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the allocation of the small hit type is the same, but such It is not limited to any form. For example, it may be configured such that the determination ratio of the small hit type is changed according to which one of the set values "1" to "6", so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

In addition, according to this characterizing portion 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of kinds of advantageous states (eg, 10R variable probability big hit, 6R probability variable big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variable big hit, 2R normal big hit). Also, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantage type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Also, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic part 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the jackpot type distribution is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessively large. to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the allocation of the jackpot type is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, it is also possible to vary the determination ratio of the jackpot type depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" is set, so that the set value makes a difference in the degree of advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Also, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, it is possible to realize more appropriate playability.

Specifically, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of variation patterns is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value is excessive. It prevents it from becoming large and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small win control to the next small win control will change, and even if the small win winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big win lottery. The degree (difference in ball output performance) is greatly different, which is not preferable, but in this characteristic part 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem is prevented. ing.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the allocation of the fluctuation pattern is the same, but such It is not limited to modes. For example, by varying the determination ratio of the variation pattern according to which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency can be varied depending on the set value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for judging a small hit) for determining to derive and display, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. and a predetermined judgment value (for example, a judgment value for discrepancy judgment). In addition, any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values can be set. Also, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Also, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all set values, and the number of predetermined determination values varies depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (eg, non-variable probability state) and a specific state (eg, variable probability state) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined judgment value is included in judgment values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is greater than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state The corresponding decision values include predetermined decision values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information increases the frequency of the special display result. Also, when a variable display is executed in which a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) is derived and displayed by being controlled to a special state, a set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) is executed. value suggestion performance) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggesting effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (eg, second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big win pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state. is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for determining the big hit and the determination value for determining the small hit). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for judging a big hit) for determining to derive and display a specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. A special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display is included. In addition, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing an appropriate playability.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous for the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced deviation stop). Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, with the aim of providing a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, is also disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Symbol) variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and variable display display Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, a part that executes steps S122 to S125 in CPU 103) and a special state that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display ( For example, a special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103) step S126 ~ S128 in the game control (for example, small hit game state) controllable portion) and a variable display execution means identifies one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the derivation and display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of the identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information A first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues is executed), the second control (for example, display the missing symbol and stop (for example, the first special symbol or The variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol)), and the first control and the second control are performed according to the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, In the modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. Therefore, steps 052 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B and S1130B are executed. For example, in Modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, it may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208 in the CPU 103). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot pattern). A specific state control means (for example, a specific state control means (for example, A game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a portion that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and the specific state control means controls to a specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result. (For example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game based on the variable probability big hit), control to the non-specific state based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, end of the big win game based on the normal jackpot) It may be configured so as not to control to the probability variable state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and is controllable to a specific state (e.g., high-probability state (variable state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low-probability state) Control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion) is provided, and the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state when the specific area (e.g., V area 052IW104) based on the game medium (for example, game ball) passed, can be controlled to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103), step 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when controlled to be in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (2) 2, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that considers whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, probability variable jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends), The variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4), variable display of first identification information and second specific display result During execution of variable display corresponding to , based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-67 (B).), variable second identification information When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the display and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is performed with the predetermined display result. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. Figures 10-66 and 10-67 See (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed.

(Means A6) In any one of means A1 to A5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, variable probability jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low probability state) Means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion) is provided, and the variable display execution means is controlled to a specific state, the first identification information and During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Step 052: Execute IWS1129A and S1130A (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), change of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the non-specific state During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether or not the control is in a specific state.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous for the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced deviation stop). Control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 052IW, with the aim of providing a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, is also disclosed.

(Means B1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special symbol). Symbol) variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and variable display display Advantageous state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, a part that executes steps S122 to S125 in CPU 103) and a special state that is different from the advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small winning pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display ( For example, a special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103) step S126 ~ S128 in the game control (for example, small hit game state) controllable portion) and a variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the first control (for example, the first variable time The updating of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the one identification information is a predetermined display result (for example, The second control (for example, to display the missing symbol and stop (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed by the missing symbol)). Which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically , the CPU 103) performs step 052 Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B and S1130B are executed according to the determination result of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in Modification 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in modification 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, special state control means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, it may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208 in the CPU 103). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is likely to be awarded due to the special state.

(Means B3) In means B1 or B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (eg, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (eg, normal jackpot pattern). A specific state control means (for example, a specific state control means (for example, A game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, a portion that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and the specific state control means controls to a specific state based on the derivation display of the first specific display result. (For example, control to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game based on the variable probability big hit), control to the non-specific state based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, end of the big win game based on the normal jackpot) It may be configured so as not to control to the probability variable state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not to be controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to B3, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, probability variable jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and is controllable to a specific state (e.g., high-probability state (variable state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low-probability state) Control means (e.g., game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion) is provided, and the specific state control means is controlled to an advantageous state when the specific area (e.g., V area 052IW104) based on the game medium (for example, game ball) passed, can be controlled to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU103), step 052IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, compared to the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when controlled to be in an advantageous state. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variable jackpot, the opening period of the V-region opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11 (2) 2, in a jackpot game based on a normal jackpot, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to implement control that considers whether or not the game medium is likely to pass through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, variable probability big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends), The variable display execution means derives and displays the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the first identification information variable display. , the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is N at step 052IWS1128A, step 052IWS1129A, S1130A (See FIG. 10-67(B).) During the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, special display in the variable display of the first identification information When the result is derived and displayed, the variable display of the second identification information is not controlled to be derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) 10-66 and 10-67 (E)). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed.

(Means B6) In any one of means B1 to B5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, probability variable jackpot pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal jackpot pattern). , the derivation display of the first specific display result is more advantageous for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, it is controlled to the variable probability state after the jackpot game ends), Specific state control that can be controlled to a specific state (e.g., high probability state (probable variable state)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (e.g., low probability state) Means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) step 052IWS2206 portion) is provided, and the variable display execution means is controlled to a specific state, the first identification information and During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) Step 052: Execute IWS1129A and S1130A (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), change of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the non-specific state During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not proceed to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see Figure 10-69). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize control that considers whether or not the control is in a specific state.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, by applying the configuration in which the setting value shown in the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed to the present characteristic portion 052IW, the setting value suggestion effect can be executed, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , configured to be capable of executing a right-handed notification, configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect at the time of over winning, configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect at the time of winning a small prize, and configured to be capable of executing a suggestive effect of displaying the number of prize balls. You may Further, for example, a configuration that allows the setting value shown in the characteristic portion 21TM to be changed is applied to the present characteristic portion 052IW, and during execution of the variable display of one special symbol, a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the other special symbol. In this case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped or continued with the missing symbol.

Also, when applying the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 021TM, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the configuration may be such that the set value is suggested by changing the aspect of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending production, mode transition notification including small win RUSH and chance mode is executed, card forgetting prevention notification such as prepaid card is executed, and manufacturer logo display is displayed. By changing the display mode of mode transition notification, card forgetting prevention notification, manufacturer's logo display, and changing the display mode of the image displayed at the same time, the setting value is suggested. You may

[Description of Characteristic Portion 18TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 18TM will be described. In this embodiment, as described above (description of the characteristic part 052IW), it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which small wins are more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this characteristic portion 18TM, the game state is controlled to a low probability state and non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state: time saving state), high probability and 1KT state (high probability / 1KT state; variable state), high probability and 2KT state (high probability / 2KT state: small hit RUSH state).

(Relationship between game state and effect symbols and effect mode)
First, each game state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state, low probability / 1st KT state: time saving state, high probability / 1st KT state: probability variable state, and high probability / 2nd KT state: small hit RUSH state) and , each production pattern (decorative pattern, first small pattern, and second small pattern) and each production mode (day mode, night mode, cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols smaller than the decorative symbols displayed in the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 indicate whether or not the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and the display result of the special symbols. is called a small pattern. The variable display of the small symbols can be performed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be performed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the upper left area of the screen of the image display device 5 where the first small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is variably displayed and stopped is displayed as the first small pattern display area 5l1, the first small pattern display area 5c1, and a first small pattern display area 5r1, and the upper right area of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the second small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is variably displayed and stopped is displayed from the left as a second small pattern display area 5l2, A second small pattern display area 5c2 and a second small pattern display area 5r2.

The first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1 and 5r1 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 are smaller in display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern, and the visibility of the second small pattern is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

11-1 and 11-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to game states. In this embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are a case where the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and a case where the variable display of the decorative design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. , which of the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display corresponds to which special symbol variable display the decorative symbol variable display is executed depends on the game state. In the following description, among the first special design and the second special design, the special design corresponding to the decoration design is called the main design, and among the first special design and the second special design, it does not correspond to the decoration design. The special design is called a sub-design.

That is, the state in which the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol means that the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol. While the variable display of one small design is executed, the variable display of the decoration design is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special design in the design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the second small design display area 512, In 5c2 and 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the state in which the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol means that the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 correspond to the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of the two small patterns is executed, and the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special design in the design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the first small design display area 5l1, In 5c1 and 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol.

As the gaming state in this embodiment, as described above, the "low probability / non-KT state" corresponding to the low probability low base state (may be referred to as normal state) and the "low Accurate/1st KT state” (sometimes referred to as time-saving state), “High accuracy/1KT state” corresponding to the high-accuracy high base state (may be referred to as the high-accuracy variable state), and high-accuracy low base state There is a corresponding "high accuracy/second KT state" (sometimes referred to as a small hit RUSH state). Then, when the game state is controlled to (i) low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub-symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, (iv) high accuracy/second KT state. In either case, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative design and the first small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special design, and the second small design is information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design. However, in the case of (ii) to (iv), the decorative design and the second small design are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special design, and the first small design is the first special design. It becomes information corresponding to the variable display. In the following description, "Special Figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "Special Figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

FIG. 11-1(A) shows the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub-symbol is the second special symbol. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the . In addition, FIG. 11-1(B) shows an image display when the gaming state is the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the device 5; FIG. In addition, FIG. 11-2 (C1) to (C3) shows that the gaming state is high probability/first KT state (probability variable state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. 5 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 at times. FIG. Also, in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the gaming state is high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when .

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reservation display area for displaying the first reservation storage number (0 to 4 first reservation displays 18TM010) 18TM011 is provided, and the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with a second pending display area 18TM021 for displaying the second pending storage number (0 to 4 second pending displays 18TM020). In addition, at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5, there is an active display which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols being executed and information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols as the main symbols being executed. An active display area 18TM031 is provided for displaying 18TM030.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first reserved display area 18TM011). A second reserved memory count special display region 18TM025 for displaying the second reserved memory count is provided in the right portion of the screen (above the second reserved memory display region 18TM021). As described above, the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 for displaying the first small patterns corresponding to the first special patterns. In the upper right portion of the screen of the display device 5, second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 are provided for displaying second small patterns corresponding to the second special patterns.

Here, in the first reserved display area 18TM011, the number of objects (round images) corresponding to the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and in the second reserved display area 18TM021, the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the first reserved memory count special display area 18TM015, and the second reserved memory count is displayed numerically in the second reserved memory count special display region 18TM025. be. The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 18TM011 is wider than the numerical display range in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and the first reserved memory number is displayed in the first reserved display area 18TM011. It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 18TM015. In addition, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 18TM021 is wider than the numerical display range in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and the second reserved memory number is displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021. 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 18TM025.

Also, in the first reserved display area 18TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state ), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (ii) low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state), (iii) high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state), and (iv) high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), any state ), the object itself is hidden. Thus, objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number are displayed in the first reserved display area 18TM011 according to the game state. On the other hand, the first reserved memory count special display area 18TM015 displays the first reserved memory count regardless of the game state (even when the game state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, even when the player is in a game state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which no object is displayed in the first reserved display area 18TM011, by confirming the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, A first reserved memory number can be grasped.

Also, in the second reserved display area 18TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (ii) low probability / first KT state (time saving state ), (iii) high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state), and (iv) high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), when in any state) corresponds to the second pending memory number The number of objects displayed is displayed, but when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state) ), the object itself is hidden. Thus, objects corresponding to the second reserved memory number are displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021 according to the game state. On the other hand, the second reserved memory count special display area 18TM025 displays the second reserved memory count regardless of the game state (even when the game state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) where no object is displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021, the player can grasp the second reserved memory number by confirming the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025. can be done.

Also, in the active display area 18TM031, regardless of the game state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that is the main symbol is displayed, and the object is the sub symbol. Objects corresponding to the variable display of special symbols that are displayed are not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the daytime mode. When the production mode is the daytime mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative design.

In this example, when the number of first reserved memories is 4 and the number of second reserved memories is 2, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is the main symbol and the second special symbol that is the sub symbol The variable display of the special symbols is executed in parallel at the same time. In addition, "4" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "2" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four first A pending indication 18TM010 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols (variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol, which is the main symbol) are variably displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 the first Variation display of small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the second small symbol (sub symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 ) is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state). When the game state is controlled to the low probability/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the night mode. When the presentation mode is the night mode, a "night image" representing a night landscape including the night sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern.

In this example, when the number of first reserved memories is 2 and the number of second reserved memories is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is a sub symbol and the second special symbol which is a main symbol The variable display of the special symbols is executed in parallel at the same time. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four second A pending indication 18TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols (the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) are variably displayed, and the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 display the first Variation display of small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub-symbol) is executed, and the second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbols) are displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is executed.

11-2 (C1) to (C3) are diagrams showing screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). When the game state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state, the player can select one of the production modes from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the selected effect mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C1), a "cloudy image" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern corresponding to the cloudy mode being the production mode. . Also, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), corresponding to the rain mode as the production mode, the background image of the decoration pattern is a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain. is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), corresponding to the typhoon mode as the production mode, the background image of the decoration pattern is a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain. image is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the first special symbol which is a sub-symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, are simultaneously executed in parallel. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four second A pending indication 18TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern (the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol that is the main symbol) are variably displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first Variation display of small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub-symbol) is executed, and second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is executed.

FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3) are diagrams showing screens of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). When the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state, the player can select one of the production modes from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the selected effect mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1), a "cloudy image" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern corresponding to the cloudy mode being the production mode. . Also, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), corresponding to the rain mode as the rendering mode, the background image of the decoration pattern is a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain. is displayed. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), corresponding to the typhoon mode as the production mode, the background image of the decoration pattern is a typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain. image is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the first special symbol which is a sub-symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, are simultaneously executed in parallel. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, and four second A pending indication 18TM020 is displayed. Also, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern (the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Also, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol that is the main symbol) are variably displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, the first Variation display of small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub-symbol) is executed, and second small symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol) are displayed in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2. ) is executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) and (D1), when the production mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the number patterns (in this example, "0" to "9") and a special pattern 18TM050 (in this example, a decorative pattern in which the letters "OPEN" are shown in an oval object, and a decorative pattern that notifies the occurrence of a small hit). A variable display of decorative patterns is performed, and a variable display of second small patterns consisting of only number patterns (“0” to “9” in this example) is performed in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C2) and (D2), when the production mode is controlled to the rain mode, the number patterns ("0" in this example) are displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. to "9") are displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 are displayed with only number patterns (in this example, "0" to "9"). Variation display of small patterns is performed.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C3) and (D3), when the production mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the number symbols (in this example, "0 ” to “9”) are displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2, the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2 consist only of number patterns (in this example, “0” to “9”). A variable display of 2 small patterns is performed.

In this embodiment, regardless of the game state and regardless of the effect mode, the symbols constituting the second small symbols are the number symbols "0" to "9", and the second small symbols are variably displayed and stopped. The areas to be displayed are the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2 and 5r2. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state or the effect mode, the second small symbols that are variably displayed are common, and the area where the variative display is performed is also common.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-2, when the game state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and when the game state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) The variation display mode of the second small symbols is common, and the variation display area of the second small symbols is also common between the two. Further, regardless of the production mode, the variable display mode of the second small symbols is common, and the variable display area of the second small symbols is also common. According to such a configuration, the period in which the game state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and the period in which the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Since the display mode and display area of the second small pattern can be made common regardless of which production mode is being controlled, the player can accurately display the second small pattern even if the production mode is switched. It is possible to comprehend.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C1), if the gaming state is controlled to high probability / 1KT state (variable probability state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1), the gaming state is highly certain /In the second KT state (small winning RUSH state) and in either case, a common "cloudy image" can be displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/1KT state (variable probability state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), the gaming state is A common "rain image" can be displayed as a background image of the decoration pattern in either case of being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small winning RUSH state). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/1KT state (variable probability state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), the gaming state is A common "typhoon image" can be displayed as a background image of the decoration pattern in either case of being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the gaming state is controlled to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the gaming state is high accuracy/second Unlike the case where it is controlled to the 1KT state (probability variable state), the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 and the lower left part of the screen correspond to being controlled to the high probability / 2KT state (small hit RUSH state) A special display 18TM100 is displayed. The special display 18TM100 includes the characters “RUSH” to notify that it is in a small hit RUSH state, and the background image (cloudy image, rain image or typhoon image).

Here, the special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image, and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). Note that the characters "RUSH" included in this special display 18TM100 may be animated to move within the area of the special display 18TM100. For example, the characters "RUSH" may be animated to move from the upper left direction to the lower right direction within the area of the special display 18TM100. Such an animation operation can further enhance the production effect in the small hit RUSH state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), in any production mode, the area where the special display 18TM100 in the upper right part of the screen is displayed is the second small pattern display areas 5l2 and 5c2. , 5r2, and does not overlap with the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025. Similarly, the area where the special display 18TM100 is displayed at the bottom left of the screen does not overlap with the active display area 18TM031 nor overlap with the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, even when it is controlled to any game state of high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), control to cloudy mode It is possible and the background image can be a "cloudy image". In addition, even when it is controlled to any game state of high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to control to rain mode, and the background image is " "rain image". In addition, even when it is controlled to either the high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state) or the high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), it can be controlled to the typhoon mode, and the background image is " typhoon image”.

In this way, when it is controlled to high accuracy / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and when it is controlled to high accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to control to a common production mode , and by being able to control to a common presentation mode, it is possible to share presentation data such as a background image. It is possible to control to a common production mode between high accuracy/1st KT state (probability variable state) and high accuracy/2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), and to execute production based on common production data (for example, background image). By making it possible, compared to the case of providing separate production modes (specific to the game state) in the high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) and the high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state), It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the performance data and reduce the development burden of the performance data.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first reserved storage number in the first reserved display area 18TM011 (the mode of the first reserved display) is the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state ) and high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) regardless of which effect mode is controlled. In addition, the display mode of the second pending memory number in the second pending display area 18TM021 (second pending display mode) is also high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) and high probability / 2KT state (small hit RUSH state) It is common regardless of which production mode is controlled. Furthermore, regardless of whether the display mode of the active display in the active display area 18TM031 is controlled to any production mode of high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) and high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) Common.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first pending display area 18TM011, high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) and high probability / 2KT state (small hit RUSH state) regardless of whether it is controlled in any production mode are common, and the second holding display area 18TM021 is also common regardless of whether it is controlled in any production mode of high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) and high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) , and the active display area 18TM031 is also common regardless of whether it is controlled to any effect mode of high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

Thus, at least, the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) , Regardless of which production mode is controlled, the display mode of the corresponding display (first pending display, second pending display, active display) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is made common, and the corresponding display ( 1st pending display, 2nd pending display, active display) are shared. As a result, the player has a period in which the game state is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and a period in which the game state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). So, even when the production mode changes, the number of reserved memories (the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories) can be easily grasped, and whether or not the variable display of special symbols is being executed. can be easily grasped.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, non-KT state (normal state), low probability / first KT state (time saving state), high probability / first KT state (probability variable state) and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the display mode of the corresponding display (first pending display, second pending display, active display) is made common, and the corresponding display (first pending display, second pending display, active display) are shared. Not limited to such a form, with respect to one or both of the non-KT state (normal state) and the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state), high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state) and high probability / 2KT The corresponding display may be displayed in a manner different from the state (small hit RUSH state), and is different from the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) A corresponding display may be displayed in the area.

That is, in the high-probability state (high-probability/1KT state, high-probability/2KT state), the production mode is shared between the 1KT state and the 2KT state, whereas the low-probability state (non-KT state, low probability / first KT state), in response to being controlled to a production mode (day mode, night mode) different from the high probability state, the display mode of the corresponding display in the low probability state is changed to the high probability state , and the display area of the correspondence display in the low-probability state may be different from the display area of the correspondence display in the high-probability state.

Thus, at least, the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) It is preferable to share the display mode of the corresponding display and to share the area in which the corresponding display is displayed regardless of which effect mode is being controlled.

It should be noted that the display mode (or display area) of the corresponding display may be changed according to which production mode is being controlled, without being limited to such a form. However, the period in which the game state is controlled to the high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state) and the period in which the game state is controlled to the high probability / 2KT state (small hit RUSH state) are common effects When the mode is controlled, the display mode (and display area) of the corresponding display shall be made common.

For example, if the production mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the corresponding display (active display, pending display) is set to a circular object with the characters "cloud" displayed, and the production mode is set to the rain mode. When it is controlled, the corresponding display (active display, pending display) is set to a mode in which the characters "rain" are shown on a round object, and when the production mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, The corresponding display (active display, suspended display) is assumed to be a circular object with the character "stand". In this way, when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed for each effect mode, the period during which the game state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and the period in which the game state is the high probability/second KT state (Small hit RUSH state) When it is controlled to the same production mode (for example, when the production mode is controlled to the cloudy mode), the display mode of the corresponding display is the same. (For example, the corresponding display is an image of a circular object with the characters "cloud").

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 is non-KT state (normal state), low probability / first KT state (time saving state), high probability / first 1KT state (probability variable state) and high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) regardless of whether it is controlled in any gaming state shall be common. In addition, the display mode of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 is also non-KT state (normal state), low probability / first KT state (time saving state), high probability / first KT state (variable probability state ), and the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state) regardless of which game state is controlled.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first pending memory number special display area 18TM015 is a non-KT state (normal state), low probability / 1KT state (time saving state), high probability / 1KT state (probability variable state), and high It is common regardless of whether it is controlled to which game state of the definite/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 also non-KT state (normal state), low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state), high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state), and high probability / 2nd KT state It is common regardless of which game state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled.

Thus, the position of the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 in the screen and the display mode of the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 may vary depending on the game state. It is common regardless of the production mode. Also, regarding the position in the screen of the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 and the display mode of the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025, regardless of the game state, Moreover, it is common regardless of the production mode. As a result, even when the image display device 5 executes an effect corresponding to each effect mode, the player can accurately grasp the number of reserved memories (the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories). It becomes possible.

(Transition of game state)
In the present embodiment, in the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), the player performs a shooting operation (left-handed hitting) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-29, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the 9% At a rate of [10R probability variable jackpot], at a rate of 56% [6R probability variable jackpot], and at a rate of 35% [6R normal jackpot].

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R probability variable big hit] occurs in the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), after the end of the big hit game, the high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state ). In addition, when [6R probability variable jackpot] occurs in the low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the transition to the high probability/first KT state (variability probability state) occurs after the jackpot game ends, and the next jackpot occurs. High probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) is maintained until it does. In addition, when [6R normal jackpot] occurs in the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), the transition to the low-probability/first KT state (short-time state) occurs after the jackpot game ends, and the next big hit occurs. The low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until the 50-time variable display is completed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the KT state (high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state), low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state), high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state)), the player A shooting operation (right hitting) of the game ball is performed aiming at the right side of the game area. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning to the second start winning opening is mainly generated, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-29, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, the ratio of [10R probability variable big hit] or [2R probability variable jackpot], [6R probability variable jackpot] occurs at a rate of 50%, and [2R normal jackpot] occurs at a rate of 35%.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, if a 10R probability variable big hit or [2R probability variable big hit] occurs in the high probability / 1KT state (variable probability state), after the big hit game is over, the high probability / 2KT state ( small hit RUSH state), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when [6R probability variable big hit] occurs in the high probability/1KT state (variable probability state), the transition to the high probability/1KT state (variable probability state) occurs after the jackpot game ends, and the next big hit occurs. The high probability/1st KT state (probability variable state) is maintained until it does. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of [6R probability variation big hit] is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so once high probability / When it comes to the 1st KT state (variable probability state), the high probability/1st KT state (variable probability state) will loop at a rate of 50%. In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the high-probability/1KT state (probability-variable state), after the jackpot game ends, the transition to the low-probability/1KT state (short-time state) occurs, and the next big hit occurs. The low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R probability variable big hit] or [2R probability variable big hit] occurs in the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state), high probability / 2KT after the end of the big hit game The state (small hit RUSH state) is shifted to, and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when [6R probability variable big hit] occurs in the low probability / 1KT state (time saving state), the transition to the high probability / 1KT state (variable probability state) occurs after the jackpot game ends, and the next big hit occurs. High probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) is maintained until it does. In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state), the transition to the low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) occurs after the jackpot game ends, and the next big hit occurs. The low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until the 50-time variable display is completed. In addition, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, the probability of [2R normal jackpot] is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). , Once it becomes a low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state), the low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state) will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after [6R normal jackpot] or [2R normal jackpot] occurs and becomes low accuracy / 1KT state (time saving state), 50 times of fluctuation display ends without the next jackpot occurring , it transitions to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state) as shown in FIG. 10-29.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R probability variable big hit] or [2R probability variable big hit] occurs in high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), high probability / It shifts to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of [10R probability variable big hit] or [2R probability variable big hit] is 15% (Fig. 10-5 (D) , See (E)), once it becomes a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when [6R probability variable big win] occurs in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state (variability probability state) after the end of the big win game, and the next big hit is won. The high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) is maintained until is generated. In addition, when [2R normal big win] occurs in the high accuracy/second KT state (small winning RUSH state), the state shifts to the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) after finishing the big winning game, and the next big winning. The low-probability/first KT state (time-saving state) is maintained until is generated or 50 times of variable display is completed.

Thus, in this embodiment, according to the jackpot type, the ratio of which game state of the high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled are different, and the game value (the number of prize balls) finally given to the player greatly differs depending on which game state the control is performed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the jackpot type when the jackpot occurs.

(Production example in each production mode)
FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5 show examples of effects in each effect mode when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). . FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the cloudy mode. , FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the rain mode. 11-5 (C1) to (C3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the typhoon mode. is.

(small hit in cloudy mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, when the player selects the cloudy mode as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode. Controlled in cloudy mode. When the production mode is the cloudy mode and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, a "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed in the part and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is displayed superimposed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image, and the special display 18TM100 is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. (Information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol (the second special symbol (information corresponding to ) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small design (information corresponding to the first special design which is a sub design) is running.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

When it is in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), the image display device 5 displays the number of consecutive small wins indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , a display of the number of prize balls awarded during consecutive small hits, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded during a period in which small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state. In this example, after the 10R variable probability big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, it is assumed that the small hit has occurred three times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as the number display. Also, during the first big win game based on the 10R probability variable big win, 15 balls×10 balls×10 rounds=1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small win, 10×3 balls=30 prize balls are obtained. 11-3 (A1) based on the fact that a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained by obtaining 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls due to the occurrence of three small hits. 2 shows a case where characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the display of the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), the effect control CPU 120, in response to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being a "minor hit" symbol, displays any symbol in the symbol display area 5L. One number pattern ("1" in this example) is stopped, and one of the number patterns ("8" in this example) is stopped in the pattern display area 5R, and a special pattern 18TM050 (ellipse A decorative pattern in which the character "OPEN" is shown in a shape object, and a decorative pattern informing the occurrence of a small hit) is stopped. Thus, in this embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5R correspond to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being "small hit". 2, the numerical symbols are confirmed and stopped, and the special symbol 18TM050 is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5C. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of a small hit (the special pattern 18TM050 will stop in the pattern display area 5C) even after the combination of the number patterns that do not result in reach in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R stops. can.

In addition, in the cloudy mode, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small pattern corresponding to the special pattern 18TM050 to be fixed and stopped when a small hit is set to "0". The second small pattern "1" corresponding to the decorative pattern (number pattern) "1", the second small pattern "0" corresponding to the special pattern 18TM050, the second small pattern in the second small pattern display area 5c2 The second small pattern "8" corresponding to the decoration pattern (number pattern) "8" is fixed and stopped in the display area 5r2. Furthermore, by displaying the characters "small hit!!" And since the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small winning consecutive number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period in which the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. and the four second reservation displays 18TM020 displayed in the second reservation display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and "small hit attacker open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. display the dialogue.

Also, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, 3 game balls enter the special winning hole, and the number of the winning balls is further increased by 10×3 balls=30, resulting in a total of 1620. shall be In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 causes three images of "+10" to be displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the number of prize balls during consecutive small hits as " 1620pt”.

(small hit in rain mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, when the player selects the rain mode as the production mode, the production control CPU 120 changes the production mode. Controlled in rain mode. When the production mode is the rain mode and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, a "rain image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed in the section and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is displayed superimposed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image, and the special display 18TM100 is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. (Information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol (the second special symbol (information corresponding to ) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small design (information corresponding to the first special design which is a sub design) is running.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

In the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a small win consecutive number display indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , a display of the number of prize balls awarded during consecutive small hits, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded during a period in which small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state. In this example, after the 10R variable probability big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, it is assumed that the small hit has occurred three times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as numerical displays. Also, during the first big win game based on the 10R probability variable big win, 15 balls×10 balls×10 rounds=1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small win, 10×3 balls=30 prize balls are obtained. 11-4 (B1) based on the fact that a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained by obtaining 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls due to the occurrence of three small hits. 2 shows a case where characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the display of the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a number in the symbol display area 5L in response to the fact that the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is the "small win" symbol. The symbol "1", the number symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and the number symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5R are fixed and stopped. Thus, in this embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the rain mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C correspond to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becoming "small hit". , and 5R, a combination of predetermined number symbols (in this example, odd number symbol order "135") is fixed and stopped. Thus, the player can expect a small win even when a combination of decoration patterns (number patterns) different from the big win pattern stops in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In addition, in the rain mode, the effect control CPU 120 sets "135" as the combination of decoration patterns (number patterns) to be fixed and stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when a small hit is achieved. In the second small design display area 5l2, the second small design "1" corresponding to the decoration design (number design) "1" is displayed, and in the second small design display area 5c2, the decoration design (number design) "3" is displayed. The second small pattern "3" corresponding to , and the second small pattern "5" corresponding to the decoration pattern (number pattern) "5" are fixed and stopped in the second small pattern display area 5r2. Furthermore, by displaying the characters "small hit!!" And since the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small winning consecutive number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period in which the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. and the four second reservation displays 18TM020 displayed in the second reservation display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and "small hit attacker open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. display the dialogue.

Also, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, 3 game balls enter the special winning hole, and the number of the winning balls is further increased by 10×3 balls=30, resulting in a total of 1620. shall be In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 displays three images of "+10" on the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits as "1620pt." ” to update.

(small hit in typhoon mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, when the player selects the typhoon mode as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode. Controlled in typhoon mode. When the production mode is the typhoon mode and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, a "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern, and is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed in the section and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is displayed superimposed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. (Information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol (the second special symbol (information corresponding to ) is executed, and in the first small design display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small design (information corresponding to the first special design which is a sub design) is running.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

When it is in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the image display device 5 displays the number of consecutive small wins indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , a display of the number of prize balls awarded during consecutive small hits, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded during a period in which small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state. In this example, after the 10R variable probability big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, it is assumed that the small hit has occurred three times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the small hit continues A case is shown in which characters such as "3rd time" are displayed as the number display. Also, during the first big win game based on the 10R probability variable big win, 15 balls×10 balls×10 rounds=1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small win, 10×3 balls=30 prize balls are obtained. 11-5 (C1) based on the fact that a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained by obtaining 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls due to the occurrence of three small hits. 2 shows a case where characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the display of the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbol display area 5L in response to the fact that the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is the "small hit" symbol. Some number pattern ("2" in this example), any number pattern in the pattern display area 5C ("4" in this example), any number pattern in the pattern display area 5R ("7" in this example) are stopped respectively. Furthermore, the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note-shaped image) is added to each of the number symbols (“2”, “4”, and “7” in this example) displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Display superimposed. The effect image 18TM060 is displayed with a higher priority than the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher than the decoration pattern and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). Thus, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C correspond to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being "small hit". In 5R, the combination of decoration patterns (number patterns) different from the jackpot patterns is stopped, and an effect image 18TM060 is superimposed on each of the stopped decoration patterns (number patterns). Thus, the player can expect a small win even when a combination of decoration patterns (number patterns) different from the big win pattern stops in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" of the decorative design (numeric design) in the second small design display area 5l2 based on the combination of the decorative design (number design) to be fixed and stopped in the design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. , a second small symbol "4" corresponding to a decorative symbol (number symbol) "4", and a second small symbol display area 5c2. At 5r2, the second small pattern "7" corresponding to the decoration pattern (number pattern) "7" is fixed and stopped. Furthermore, by displaying the characters "small hit!!" And since the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small winning consecutive number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period in which the game state is controlled to the small winning game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. and the four second reservation displays 18TM020 displayed in the second reservation display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and "small hit attacker open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. display the dialogue.

Also, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, 3 game balls enter the special winning opening, and the number of winning balls is further increased by 10×3 balls=30, resulting in a total of 1620. shall be In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the effect control CPU 120 causes three images of "+10" to be displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits as "1620pt." ” to update.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state), the player can select one of the cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. Mode can be selected. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the production mode is the cloudy mode, when the second special symbol fluctuation display result becomes "small hit", the symbol display area 5L, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by fixing and stopping the number pattern in the pattern display area 5R and fixing and stopping the special pattern 18TM050 in the pattern display area 5C. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the production mode is the rain mode, when the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is "small hit", Occurrence of a small hit is notified by fixing and stopping a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135") in order of odd-numbered symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3), when the production mode is the typhoon mode, when the second special symbol fluctuation display result is "small win", the symbol display area By fixing and stopping the combination of decorative patterns in which effect images 18TM060 (in this example, musical note-shaped images) are superimposed on 5L, 5C, and 5R, occurrence of a small hit is notified.

In this way, the effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit (the effect of fixing and stopping the decorative pattern) differs depending on the effect mode, and the player can select the effect mode to win a small win depending on which effect. It is also possible to select whether to notify the occurrence. As a result, the performance when a small win occurs in the high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state) can be made the player's desired performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, number patterns ("0" to "9" in this example) and special patterns 18TM050 (" Variation display of decorative symbols including small winning symbols showing the characters "OPEN" is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), when the production mode is the rain mode, a variable display of decoration patterns including only number patterns (“0” to “9” in this example) is performed. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), when the production mode is the typhoon mode, a variable display of decoration patterns including only number patterns (“0” to “9” in this example) is performed. At the same time, when the display result is "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 is superimposed and displayed when the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped. Thus, depending on the production mode, it is possible to vary the display mode of the decorative symbols, and the game state is controlled to a high accuracy state (high accuracy/first KT state, high accuracy/second KT state). It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when playing.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5, when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), control to any production mode The display of the number of continuous small hits is displayed in the lower right part of the screen in a common display mode regardless of whether or not it is set, and the number of consecutive small winning balls is displayed regardless of which production mode is controlled. are displayed in the lower right part of the screen in a common display mode. According to such a configuration, since the display mode and the display area for displaying the number of continuous small wins can be shared in each performance mode, the player can enjoy continuous small wins during the second KT state even when the game mode is switched. The number of times can be accurately grasped. In addition, since the display mode and display area of the display of the number of consecutive small winning balls can be shared in each performance mode, the player can continuously generate small winnings in the second KT state even if the performance mode is switched. It is possible to accurately comprehend the number of prize balls given during the period.

(Selection period of production mode)
In this embodiment, (1) the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state), high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and the second special symbol The period during which the variable display (variable display of the second small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) is being performed, and (2) it is performed in response to the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot. During the period of the jackpot ending, the player can select the performance mode, and during the period when neither (1) nor (2) applies, the player cannot select the performance mode. That is, the player can select any one of the cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode only during either period (1) or (2).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol ) is being executed, the presentation mode cannot be selected.

As variable probability big hits in this embodiment, (i) [6R variable probability big hit] controlled to high probability/1KT state after the end of the big win game state, and (ii) controlled to high probability/2KT state after the end of the big win game state. [10R probability variable jackpot], and (iii) after the jackpot game state ends, there is a [2R probability variable jackpot] controlled to a high probability/second KT state, and (i) ~ (iii) jackpot type jackpot game state During the period of the jackpot ending executed corresponding to the end, the player can select the performance mode. On the other hand, the period of the jackpot ending executed in response to the end of the jackpot game state of the normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) controlled to the low probability/high base state after the jackpot game state ends is the production mode. It is not possible to select.

(Production mode selection for the jackpot ending period)
Next, an example of the effect when the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of the probability variable jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7. FIG. 11-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of the variable probability big win, and FIGS. / It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when selecting the effect mode in the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variable jackpot] controlled to the 1st KT state, FIGS. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the effect mode is selected in the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot] which is controlled to a high probability/2KT state after the end.

(Production mode selection when controlled to high accuracy / 1st KT state)
Regarding the production example when selecting the production mode in the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variable jackpot] controlled to high probability / 1KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot, FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7 (A1) (A4) will be used.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A1), when the jackpot type is [6R probability variable jackpot], when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, it corresponds to the start of the jackpot ending period. Then, an effect mode selection period in which the effect mode can be selected is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect mode selection screen, thereby starting the effect mode selection period.

On the production mode selection screen, an image corresponding to each selectable production mode (cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C) is displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B. and an operation prompting display 18TM210 that notifies that the selection of the production mode is possible and prompts the player to select the production mode by operating the push button 31B, and the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (production mode and a time bar 18TM220 announcing the remaining period of the selection period.

The performance mode image display area 18TM250 is located in the center of the screen, the operation promotion display 18TM210 is displayed in the lower left part of the screen, and the time bar 18TM220 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The operation prompting display 18TM210 is an image imitating the shape of the push button 210, the characters "PUSH" are displayed on the left side of the operation prompting display 18TM210, and the characters "select with" are displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 18TM210. By being displayed, the player is urged to select an effect mode by operating the push button 210 . In addition, the time bar 18TM220 is displayed with 100% remaining time at the beginning of display, that is, at the timing when the effect mode selection period is started, and the percentage of remaining time gradually decreases as time passes. , the remaining time is displayed as 0% at the timing when the performance mode selection period ends.

An effect mode image corresponding to the currently selected effect mode is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250. In this example, since the cloudy mode image 18TM200A is displayed as the effect mode image, it means that the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode. Here, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen to the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the movement, the effect mode image displayed on the left end of the screen is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen. The effect mode images displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 are switched in the order of cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C, and so on every time the push button 31B is operated.

In addition, the time bar 18TM220 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, and the production mode in the jackpot ending period is determined by the ratio (0 to 100%) of the range of the white portion with respect to the entire width of the time bar 18TM220. is notified of the production mode selection period, which is a period in which the can be selected. The production mode selection period indicated by the time bar 18TM220 is subtracted and updated every time the time elapses after the initial value (100%) is indicated, and finally reaches the final value (0%). Then, when the time bar 18TM220 becomes the final value (0%), the effect mode corresponding to the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 is performed. The player operates the push button 31B until the display of the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%) to change the effect mode image to be displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 to correspond to the desired effect mode. Switch to the production mode image.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A2), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the performance mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the rain mode is selected as the effect mode. Also, the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 75%, which means that 25% of the entire presentation mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A3), in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the left end of the screen. The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode. Also, the display of the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to the remaining 25%, which means that 75% of the entire effect mode selection period has elapsed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 0%, and at the timing when the production mode selection period ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the production Based on the typhoon mode image 18TM200C being displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be the typhoon mode. When the typhoon mode is selected as the presentation mode, the presentation control CPU 120 notifies that the presentation mode will be controlled to the typhoon mode by enlarging and displaying the typhoon mode image 18TM200C in the center of the screen.

(Production mode selection when controlled to high accuracy / 2nd KT state)
FIG. 11-6 with regard to the production example when the production mode is selected in the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variable big hit] or [2R probability variable big hit] which is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit. and FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B4).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B1), when the jackpot type is [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot], when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, the jackpot ending Corresponding to the start of the period, the production mode selection period in which the production mode can be selected is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect mode selection screen, thereby starting the effect mode selection period.

Here, unlike the case where it is controlled to a high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit, based on being controlled to a high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit The control CPU 120 blinks the characters "RUSH" in the upper part of the screen (above the effect mode image display area 18TM250). By blinking the characters "RUSH", it is possible to inform the player that the game is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small winning RUSH state).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B2), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the performance mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the rain mode is selected as the effect mode. Here also, by blinking the letters "RUSH" at the top of the screen, the rain mode corresponding to the rain mode image 18TM200B is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can comprehend. Also, the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 75%, which means that 25% of the entire presentation mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B3), in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the left end of the screen. The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right side of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode. Here again, the word "RUSH" is blinking at the top of the screen, indicating that the typhoon mode corresponding to the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can comprehend. Also, the display of the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to the remaining 25%, which means that 75% of the entire effect mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 0%, and at the timing when the production mode selection period ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the production Based on the typhoon mode image 18TM200C being displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be the typhoon mode. When the effect mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode by enlarging and displaying the typhoon mode image 18TM200C in the center of the screen.

At this time, based on being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit, the effect control CPU 120 displays the following in the upper right and lower left portions of the enlarged display of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C, respectively. A special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed. In addition, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp showing the characters "RUSH" is superimposed on the central portion of the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C. The special display 18TM100 has a higher priority than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C (the display layer is higher than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player). Furthermore, the image 18TM230 has a higher priority than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and the special display 18TM100 (the display layer is higher than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and the special display 18TM100). It is displayed in a superimposed manner) so that it can be seen in front of the player. That is, the display priority in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is higher in the order of background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C<special display 18TM100<image 18TM230.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3), in the production mode selection period (jackpot ending period), by blinking the characters "RUSH", after the jackpot ends ( After the end of the jackpot ending period), an effect is being executed to notify that it will be controlled to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), but not limited to such a form, the effect mode selection period (jackpot ending period), the effect of notifying that it is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is not executed, and whether it is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) It may be difficult for the player to perceive.

For example, during the production mode selection period (jackpot ending period), the suggestive production is executed, so that after the jackpot ends (after the jackpot ending period), it is controlled to a high accuracy/second KT state (small win RUSH state). may be suggested. Then, when the executed suggesting performance (RUSH suggesting performance) ends in a successful mode, it is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small winning RUSH state) after the big win (after the big win ending period ends). On the other hand, when the executed suggestion performance (RUSH suggestion performance) ends in a failure mode, it is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big win (after the end of the big win ending period). .

For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "RUSH" in the RUSH suggesting effect of the success mode, and then displays a blackout effect (displays a darkening image as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5). By doing so, the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern is lowered to make it difficult to see. Next, an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is superimposed on the darkened image. Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is terminated (by hiding the darkened image as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5, the background image is and improve the visibility of the decorative pattern to make it easy to see), and by displaying the image 18TM230 in which the characters “RUSH” are shown in the center of the screen, the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Notify the transition.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the blackout effect after displaying the characters "RUSH" in the RUSH suggestion effect of the failure mode, as in the case of the success mode. Next, as in the case of the successful mode, an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is superimposed on the darkened image. Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is terminated, and an image showing the characters "failure" is displayed in the center of the screen, whereby the high accuracy/second KT is displayed. It informs that it does not shift to the state (small hit RUSH state) (in this case, it shifts to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state)).

As described above, in the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, when controlled to the high probability/second KT state (minor win RUSH state) after the jackpot ends, the RUSH suggestion performance of the success mode is executed, and the jackpot ends. If it is not controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) later, it is possible to execute the RUSH suggestion performance of the failure mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when selecting the production mode.

Here, the RUSH suggesting effect of the success mode and the RUSH suggesting effect of the failure mode share the effect mode of the first half of the effect, and the player can determine whether the RUSH suggesting effect is the success mode or the failure mode in the first half of the RUSH suggesting effect. It is not possible to grasp whether it is a mode. Then, in the second half of the RUSH suggestion production, whether it is a success mode (high probability after the end of the big hit / whether it is controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) or a failure mode (high probability / after the end of the big hit) Whether it is controlled to the first KT state (probability variable state) is notified.

In this example, when the RUSH suggestion production of the first mode (success mode) is executed, it is always controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends, and the second mode (failure Aspect) when the RUSH suggestion effect is executed, an example is shown that is always controlled to a high probability / first KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit, but not limited to this, the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect Even if is executed, it may be possible to provide an effect pattern that is controlled to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit, and even if the RUSH suggestive effect of the second mode is executed An effect pattern may be provided in which the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled after the end of the big hit. However, when the RUSH suggestive effect of the first mode is executed, it is controlled to a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit is completed than when the RUSH suggestive effect of the second mode is executed. is high, and when the RUSH suggesting performance of the second mode is executed, control is performed to a high probability / first KT state (probability variable state) after the end of the big hit than when the RUSH suggesting performance of the first mode is executed. It is assumed that the ratio of

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7, during the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the player can hit the jackpot by operating the push button 31B. It is possible to select which of the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode as the presentation mode to be controlled after the game state ends. According to such a configuration, since the player can select a desired performance mode when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), in the production mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, based on being controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot ends, the production The control CPU 120 superimposes a special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) on the upper right and lower left of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C of the image display device 5, An image 18TM230 imitating a stamp showing the characters "RUSH" is superimposed on the central portion of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C.

In this way, the game state after the end of the big win is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), and the game state after the end of the big win is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state). The performance mode image displayed in the performance mode image display area 18TM250 is also shared in the performance mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, corresponding to the fact that the performance can be executed by the common performance mode. That is, in any game state, when the cloudy mode is selected, the cloudy mode image 18TM200A corresponding to the cloudy mode is displayed, and when the rain mode is selected, the cloudy mode image 18TM200A corresponding to the rain mode is displayed. A rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed, and when the typhoon mode is selected, a typhoon mode image 18TM200C corresponding to the typhoon mode is displayed.

However, the effect control CPU 120, when the game state after the end of the big win is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the game state after the end of the big win is the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state). Additional information indicating that the game state after the end of the big win is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) is displayed. Specifically, as additional information, the characters "RUSH" (see FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3)) are displayed above the currently selected presentation mode image. In addition, as additional information, a special display 18TM100 is superimposed on the lower left and upper right of the determined production mode image, and an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp with the characters "RUSH" displayed in the center (Fig. 11- 7 (see B4)) is superimposed. As a result, while the performance mode image corresponding to the performance mode being selected is shared, the game state after the end of the big win is changed to a high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) and a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can grasp which game state is controlled.

(Direction mode selection during the period when the variable display is being performed)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/first KT state, and the variable display of the second special symbol in the high probability/second KT state is being executed, it is possible to select the production mode. An example of the effect when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11.

FIG. 11-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when selecting the effect mode during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/first KT state, and FIG. 11-9. is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image in the case of selecting the effect mode during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/first KT state. 11-10 is a time chart showing execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy/second KT state, and FIG. -11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the effect mode is selected during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state.

(High accuracy / 1st KT state production mode selection)
When the game state is high probability / 1st KT state (probability variable state), when selecting the production mode during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, an example of the execution timing of each production and the production image will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A1), when the game state is controlled to a high probability / first KT state (probability variable state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode, by the production control CPU 120 , the "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols (in the main symbol information corresponding to a certain second special symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol ) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern which is a sub-pattern) is performed. Running.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the currently selected effect mode ([cloudy mode] in this example) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the fact that the effect mode can be selected. An icon 18TM300 is displayed, and an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed below the icon 18TM300. The operation prompting display 18TM210 is an image that imitates the push button 31B, and the characters "select with" are displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 18TM210, so that the player can receive an effect by operating the push button 31B. It is informed that it is possible to change modes.

In this embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, [(production mode)] indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen is displayed. In response to the fact that [(production mode)] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 has been switched, the actual production mode will be changed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. .

Specifically, each time the push button 31B is operated, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 to [cloudy mode]→[rain mode]→[typhoon mode]. switch in order. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol being executed ends, [effect mode] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen changes to the currently controlled effect mode (that is, execution It is confirmed whether it is different from the production mode corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that has been displayed.

Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, if the [effect mode] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is different from the effect mode currently being controlled, the effect mode change effect is executed. Then, the effect mode is changed from the current effect mode to the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. On the other hand, if the [effect mode] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is the same as the effect mode currently being controlled (that is, the push button 31B has not been operated, or the push button 31B has been operated) When the same production mode as the current production mode is selected), the production mode is not changed without executing the production mode change production.

For example, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, when the actual production mode is the cloudy mode, the production mode indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is [rain mode] or [typhoon mode]. When there is, the effect mode change effect is executed, and when the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is [cloudy mode], the effect mode change effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen. Switch the show mode shown to Rain Mode. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [rain mode], an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. is continuously displayed, the player is notified that selection (change) of the production mode is possible by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen. Switch the shown presentation mode to [Typhoon Mode]. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [typhoon mode], an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select by" on the right side thereof. is continuously displayed, the player is notified that selection (change) of the production mode is possible by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A4), at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-9), the effect control CPU 120 changes the image display device 5 The decoration pattern "1" in the design display area 5L, the decoration design "4" in the design display area 5C, and the decoration design "8" in the design display area 5R are confirmed and stopped, and the image display device 5 displays the second small design. The second small symbol "1" in the area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "8" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixed and stopped. .

In this example, the variation display result of the second special symbol shows an example of "small hit", but when the game state is high probability/first KT state (probability variation state), the variation display result In order not to notify that the is a "small hit" (to make it difficult for the player to recognize), the combination of decorative symbols that suggests that the result of the variable display is "lost" is confirmed and stopped, and the variable display The combination of the second small symbols suggesting that the result is "loss" is fixed and stopped. Similarly, when the game state is low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state), in order not to notify that the fluctuation display result is "small hit" (to make it difficult for the player to recognize), The combination of decoration patterns suggesting that the variable display result is "lost" is fixed and stopped, and the combination of the second small patterns that suggests that the variable display result is "loose" is fixed and stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and at the same time displays an operation prompt prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 18TM210 and the character "select by" displayed on the right side are erased. This notifies the player that the selection (change) of the production mode is not possible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (period of T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-8), and displays the full screen of the image display device 5 with A mode change image 18TM310 showing characters "MODE CHANGE" is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decoration pattern, and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). . In addition, the mode change image 18TM310 includes the active display 18TM030 of the active display area 18TM031, the first reserved display 18TM010 of the first reserved display area 18TM011, and the second reserved display 18TM020 of the second reserved display area 18TM021, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Displayed with a higher priority than objects that support display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, although it is displayed with a higher priority than the background image, the decoration pattern, the suspended display, and the active display. The first small design, the second small design displayed in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and The second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310. are superimposed so that they can be seen in the foreground). Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the first reserved display 18TM010 of the first reserved display area 18TM011 and the second reserved display 18TM020 of the second reserved display area 18TM021 are difficult to see. The first reserved memory number displayed in the reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 are continuously visible.

At this time (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-8), the background image of the decoration pattern is changed to "Typhoon image will be displayed. However, during the period when the effect mode change effect is executed, the mode change image 18TM310, which has a higher display priority than the background image, is displayed on the entire screen, making it difficult to see the changed background image, the “typhoon image”. It is in a good state.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "small win", as described above, the variation display result is In order not to inform the player of the "minor win" (to make it difficult for the player to recognize), a combination of decoration patterns ("148" in this example) suggesting that the result of the variable display is "lost" is added. The second small symbol combination ("148" in this example), which suggests that the variable display result is "loss", is continuously fixed and stopped. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image<[decoration pattern, first reserved display 18TM010, second reserved display 18TM020, active display 18TM030]<mode change image 18TM310<[first small pattern, second small pattern, first reserved memory number in first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and second reserved memory number in second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025].

The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decoration pattern, and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). . Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and the decoration pattern. In addition, the player cannot recognize that the background image has changed from the "cloudy image" to the "typhoon image" (the timing at which the background image has changed from the "cloudy image" to the "typhoon image"). . On the other hand, the second small pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the effect mode change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A6), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the effect mode change effect (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-8). In response to the end of the effect mode change effect, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 indicating the characters "mode CHANGE" is ended. When the typhoon mode is selected as the presentation mode, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, so the mode change image 18TM310 having the higher display priority is displayed. is completed, the "typhoon image" as a background image of the decorative design becomes visible together with the decorative design.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was "small win", as described above, the variation display result is In order not to inform the player of the "minor win" (to make it difficult for the player to recognize), a combination of decoration patterns ("148" in this example) suggesting that the result of the variable display is "lost" is added. The second small symbol combination ("148" in this example), which suggests that the variable display result is "loss", is continuously fixed and stopped. In FIG. 11-9 (A6), as the display of the mode change image 18TM310 having the higher display priority ends, the decoration pattern, which was once difficult to see, and the first reserved display 18TM010 and the second Pending indication 18TM020 and active indication 18TM030 are again clearly visible.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is Since it is 4, "4" is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. FIG. Further, the active display area 18TM031 continuously displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays the second reserved display. Four 18TM020 are displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [Typhoon Mode] on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A7), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , while starting the variable display of decorative patterns (information corresponding to the second special pattern which is the main pattern), in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small patterns (Information corresponding to special symbols) is started to be displayed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays characters "select by" on the right side of the operation prompting display 18TM210. , it is notified that the production mode can be selected again.

(High accuracy / 2nd KT state production mode selection)
When the game state is a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the execution timing of each effect and the effect image when selecting the effect mode during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. An example will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode, for production control The CPU 120 displays the "cloudy image" as the background image of the decoration pattern. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbols (in the main symbol information corresponding to a certain second special symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, and 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol ) is executed, and in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small pattern (information corresponding to the first special pattern which is a sub-pattern) is performed. Running.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5 . The active display area 18TM031 displays an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the currently selected effect mode ([cloudy mode] in this example) in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the fact that the effect mode can be selected. An icon 18TM300 is displayed, and an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed below the icon 18TM300.

Here, when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state ), a special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to . The special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that it can be seen in front of the player).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a special display 18TM100 in which the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are shown at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. is displayed, an effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is displayed, an operation prompting display 18TM210 is displayed below it, and the characters "select with" are displayed on the right side. At this time, the production mode selection icon 18TM300, the operation prompting display 18TM210, and the character "Select with" have a higher priority than the special display 18TM100 (the display layer is higher than the special image 18TM100 and is in front of the player). are displayed in a superimposed manner). That is, the display priority of each effect image is higher in the order of background image<special display 18TM100<[effect mode selection icon 18TM300, operation prompting display 18TM210, text "select by"].

When it is in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), the image display device 5 displays the number of consecutive small wins indicating the number of consecutive small wins during the second KT state. , the display of the number of winning balls during the small winning continuation indicating the number of winning balls generated during the period in which the small winning is continuously occurring in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, after the [10R probability variable big hit] occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, it is assumed that three small hits have occurred up to the present time, and as shown in FIG. A case is shown in which characters such as "third time" are displayed as the number of consecutive winnings. In addition, 15 balls x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1,500 prize balls are obtained during the first jackpot game based on the [10R probability variable jackpot], and then 10 balls x 3 balls = 30 prize balls for each small hit. is obtained, and 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls are obtained by the occurrence of three small hits, so that a total of 1590 prize balls are obtained. As shown in B1), a case is shown in which characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the display of the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen. Switch the show mode shown to Rain Mode. Then, even after the presentation mode indicated by the presentation mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "rain mode", an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. continue to be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the bottom left of the screen. Switch the shown presentation mode to [Typhoon Mode]. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "typhoon mode", an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. continue to be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol "1" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, and the special symbol 18TM050 (elliptical object) in the symbol display area 5C. ), the decorative symbol "8" is confirmed and stopped in the symbol display area 5R, and the second small symbol " 1", the second small symbol "0" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "8" in the second small symbol display area 5r2. timing).

That is, in response to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes a "small win", the combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the display result is a "small win" is determined and stopped. , the combination of the second small symbols corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols is determined and stopped. Further, in response to the control to the small winning game state, the occurrence of the small winning is notified by displaying the characters "small winning!!" on the upper part of the screen. And since the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small winning consecutive number display to "fourth time".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, while prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. The promotion display 18TM210 and the character "select by" displayed on the right side are erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), the game state is controlled to the small winning game state, and during the period in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display area 18TM031. and the four second reservation displays 18TM020 displayed in the second reservation display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and "small hit attacker open!" are displayed on the image display device 5. display the dialogue.

Also, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, 3 game balls enter the special winning hole, and the number of the winning balls is further increased by 10×3 balls=30, resulting in a total of 1620. shall be In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), the effect control CPU 120 displays three images of "+10" at the bottom of the screen, and updates the display of the number of winning balls during consecutive small hits to "1620pt". .

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (period of T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and displays the full screen of the image display device 5 with A mode change image 18TM310 showing characters "MODE CHANGE" is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decoration pattern, and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). . In addition, the mode change image 18TM310 includes the active display 18TM030 of the active display area 18TM031, the first reserved display 18TM010 of the first reserved display area 18TM011, and the second reserved display 18TM020 of the second reserved display area 18TM021, that is, the variation of the special symbol. Displayed with a higher priority than objects that support display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed in the first small pattern display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1, although it is displayed with a higher priority than the background image, the decoration pattern, the suspended display, and the active display. The first small design, the second small design displayed in the second small design display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and The second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310. are superimposed so that they can be seen in the foreground). Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the first reserved display 18TM010 of the first reserved display area 18TM011 and the second reserved display 18TM020 of the second reserved display area 18TM021 are difficult to see. The first reserved memory number displayed in the reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 are continuously visible.

At this time (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), the background image of the decoration pattern is changed to "Typhoon image will be displayed. However, during the period when the effect mode change effect is executed, the mode change image 18TM310, which has a higher display priority than the background image, is displayed on the entire screen, making it difficult to see the changed background image, the “typhoon image”. It is in a good state.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 responds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was a "small hit", and the production mode is the typhoon mode. As a combination of decorative patterns, the decorative pattern "2" is displayed in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "4" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "7" is displayed in the pattern display area 5R, and the pattern display area 5L is displayed. An effect image 18TM060 (a musical note-shaped image in this example) is displayed superimposed on each of the number patterns displayed in , 5C, and 5R. Further, as a combination of the second small patterns, the second small pattern "2" is displayed in the second small pattern display area 5l2, the second small pattern "4" is displayed in the second small pattern display area 5c2, and the second small pattern display area. 5r2 stops displaying the second small symbol "7". Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image<[decorative pattern, first reserved display 18TM010, second reserved display 18TM020, active display 18TM030]<effect image 18TM060<mode change image 18TM310<[first small pattern , second small pattern, first reserved memory number in first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and second reserved memory number in second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025].

The mode change image 18TM310 has a higher priority than the background image and the decoration pattern (including the effect image 18TM060) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decoration pattern (including the effect image 18TM060), and is in front of the player). are displayed in a superimposed manner). Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and decoration patterns (including the effect image 18TM060). In addition, the player cannot recognize that the background image has changed from the "cloudy image" to the "typhoon image" (the timing at which the background image has changed from the "cloudy image" to the "typhoon image"). . On the other hand, the second small pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is superimposed and displayed so that it can be seen in front of the player). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the production mode change.

Here, when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the second small pattern (symbol corresponding to the small win) being displayed changes from the small win pattern "108" corresponding to the cloudy mode to the small win corresponding to the typhoon mode. It will be changed to a pattern (combination of number patterns different from the jackpot pattern).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect mode change effect (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10). In response to the end of the effect mode change effect, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 indicating the characters "mode CHANGE" is ended. When the typhoon mode is selected as the presentation mode, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, so the mode change image 18TM310 having the higher display priority is displayed. is completed, the "typhoon image" as a background image of the decorative design becomes visible together with the decorative design.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (executed most recently) was a "small hit", and the decoration in the case where the effect mode is the typhoon mode. As a combination of patterns, the decorative pattern "2" is continuously displayed in the pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern "4" is displayed in the pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern "7" is continuously displayed in the pattern display area 5R. An effect image 18TM060 (a musical note-shaped image in this example) is continuously superimposed on each of the number patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The second small symbol "2" is displayed in the display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "7" is continued in the second small symbol display area 5r2. I am displaying. In FIG. 11-11 (B7), with the end of the display of the mode change image 18TM310 with the higher display priority, the decorative patterns (including the effect image 18TM060), which were once difficult to see, and the second 1 pending indication 18TM010, second pending indication 18TM020 and active indication 18TM030 are again clearly visible.

Since the first reserved memory number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display "2" in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved memory number is Since it is 4, "4" is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. FIG. Further, the active display area 18TM031 continuously displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays the second reserved display. Four 18TM020 are displayed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [Typhoon Mode] on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B8), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 controls the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , while starting the variable display of decorative patterns (information corresponding to the second special pattern which is the main pattern), in the second small pattern display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small patterns (Information corresponding to the special symbol) has started to be displayed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B on the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays characters "select by" on the right side thereof.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state (high accuracy/first KT state, high accuracy/second KT state), according to the action of the player during the variable display of the second special symbol, selection of the production mode (change of production mode) is possible. When the game state is a low probability state (low probability/low base state, low probability/first KT state), the icon for selecting the production mode is not displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the player enters the production mode. selection (change of production mode) cannot be performed. Also, even when the gaming state is a high probability state (high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state), the period during which the second special symbol is not displayed (variation display of the second special symbol is not executed and only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) The icon for selecting the performance mode is not displayed, and the player cannot select the performance mode (change the performance mode).

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, in this embodiment, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the decorative pattern is determined and stopped to generate a small hit. is made different according to which production mode is controlled. Also, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B3), during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the effect mode is changed in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player. You can switch. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, the effect mode change effect is executed, and the character "mode CHANGE" is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Image 18TM310 is displayed.

In this way, in the present embodiment in which the combination of decorative symbols to be confirmed and stopped when a small hit occurs differs according to the production mode, if the production mode is changed, the mode change image 18TM310 is not displayed. Assume that a configuration (that is, a configuration that does not reduce the visibility of the background image and decorative pattern) is adopted. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the production mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is "small hit", and the image A special pattern 18TM050 (a small winning pattern in which the character "OPEN" is displayed in an oval object) is confirmed and stopped in the pattern display area 5C of the display device 5, and after the small winning game is completed, the background image, decorative patterns, etc. are displayed. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B7), the production mode is changed while the visibility is not degraded (the background image, the decorative pattern, etc. can be continuously and clearly seen). It will change to typhoon mode. As a result, along with the change of the background image, the decoration pattern in the stopped state is also changed (the combination of the number patterns superimposed with the effect image 18TM060 is displayed), so that the screen (decoration pattern, background image) suddenly changes. , the player is confused.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, the pattern display area of the image display device 5 is displayed by superimposing the mode change image 18TM310 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. By reducing the visibility of the entire screen including 5L, 5C, and 5R, once the visibility of the decoration pattern in the production mode before the change is lowered, the visibility of the decoration pattern in the production mode after the change is improved. Therefore, even in the present embodiment in which the decoration patterns differ between the production mode before the change and the production mode after the change, the confusion of the player due to the switching of the screen (decorative pattern, background image) can be avoided. can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the game state is controlled to a high probability / first KT state (variable probability state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode, production control The "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decoration pattern by the CPU 120, and as shown in FIGS. ), when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays a "cloudy image" as the background image of the decorative pattern. The "cloudy image" as the background image is a common background image in the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the game state is controlled to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), the upper right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 and the lower left portion of the screen 11-11 (B1) ~ ( As shown in B5), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high accuracy/second KT state ( A special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the small hit RUSH state is superimposed. According to such a configuration, the background image can be shared between the highly accurate/first KT state and the highly accurate/second KT state, and the highly accurate/first KT state and the highly accurate/second KT state can be specified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the production mode In the upper right part and lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed. ing. Then, even after the effect mode is changed, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the effect mode When the typhoon mode is selected as , the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are displayed in the upper right part and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The indicated special display 18TM100 is displayed. That is, since this special display 18TM100 is common regardless of the production mode, in this embodiment that can be controlled in a plurality of types of production modes, the game state is controlled to a high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It can be made clearer that

As shown in FIG. 11-9, if the gaming state is controlled to a high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state), as shown in FIG. RUSH state), when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated by the player during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the production mode at the bottom left of the screen. The display of [cloudy mode] indicated by the selection icon 18TM300 is switched in the order of display of [rain mode]→display of [typhoon mode]. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, [typhoon mode] indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode). , the effect mode is changed from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode) to the effect mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. Thus, when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/first KT state (variable probability state), when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the second special During the period in which the variable display of patterns is executed, it is possible to control one of a plurality of types of performance modes based on the player's actions, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(Big hit countdown production)
As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time. Further, when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol with the display result of "big hit", the second special symbol with the display result of "loss" or "small hit" is displayed. When the variable display of the symbols is started, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a big win countdown effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the display result is "big win". It should be noted that when the variable display of the first special symbol with the display result of "big win" is executed, the variable display result of the second special symbol to be started shall be "loss" or "minor hit". .

When the big win countdown effect is executed, the countdown display until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol with the display result as "big win" is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加The countdown display has a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern that is the main pattern) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern, and is positioned in front of the player). are displayed in a superimposed manner). That is, by executing the big hit countdown effect, the countdown display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, so that the visibility of the decoration pattern corresponding to the second special pattern which is the main pattern is lowered, and the sub pattern is reduced. It can be noted that the variation display result of the first special symbol is "big hit". In addition, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high accuracy/second KT state, it is possible to control to one of the production modes selected from a plurality of types of production modes. It can be executed in common even when it is controlled by the mode. According to such a configuration, in the present embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel, the effect related to the big hit notification corresponding to the special symbol which is the sub-symbol is produced. Interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit", the second special symbol whose display result is "miss" or "minor hit" Although an example is shown in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the big win countdown effect at the timing of starting the variable display, the big win countdown effect may be executed at other timings. For example, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the second special symbol in which (i) the display result is "loss" or "minor hit", (ii) the first special symbol in which the display result is "big hit" is executed. When the variation display of the symbols is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines that (ii) the display result is "loss" when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in which the display result is "jackpot". Or at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a "small hit" is completed, and (iii) the display result is a "loss" or a "small hit" and the variable display of the next second special symbol is started, A big win countdown effect may be executed.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, as an effect of switching the performance mode, a small hit RUSH can be played in a performance mode that matches the taste of each player, and the interest can be improved. In addition, since the effect mode can be switched not only during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, but also during the variable display of the special symbols, the convenience of the player can be improved. Furthermore, in a situation where the small winning RUSH is continued for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the production mode, the game becomes monotonous even during the period in which the advantageous value is given, and the interest is reduced. Since the performance mode can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small winning RUSH can be eliminated, and the interest in the period during which the advantageous value is given can be further enhanced.

(other features and variations)
(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-29, the KT state (high probability / 1st KT state (variable probability state), low probability / 1st KT state (time saving state), high probability / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state)), mainly because the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, mainly [10R probability variable big hit], [2R probability variable big hit], [6R probability variable big hit] , and [2R normal jackpot] occurs, and when [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs, after the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the next jackpot occurs. Although an example is shown in which the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the game is played, this is not limited to such a form, and when [2R probability variable big hit] occurs, the game state is shifted to may

For example, when [2R variable probability big hit] occurs while being controlled in the KT state, the state shifts to the high probability/first KT state (variable probability state) after the big win game ends, and the next big win occurs. The high probability/first KT state (probability variable state) is maintained until 50 times of variable display is completed. And when the next big hit does not occur and the 50 times of fluctuation display is completed, it shifts from the 51st fluctuation display to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) until the next big hit occurs. It may be a game state in which the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained. In addition, when [2R probability variable jackpot] occurs, the game state shifts to high probability / 1KT state (variable probability state), but as a background image, the night scenery including the night sky and mountains is displayed. image", that is, the background image common to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state).

At this time, when [2R variable probability big win] occurs, the state is shifted to high probability/1KT state (variable probability state) after the end of the big win game, and the next big win does not occur after 50 times of variable display. In the 50th variation display, the above-described success mode RUSH suggestion effect may be executed, and from the 51st variation display, the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) may be shifted. In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs, after the jackpot game ends, it shifts to the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), and when the next jackpot does not occur in 50 times of fluctuation display. may execute the failure mode RUSH suggestive effect described above at the 50th variable display, and shift to the low probability/non-KT state (normal state) from the 51st variable display.

In this way, when the KT state is controlled, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is common between the case where the [2R probability variable big win] occurs and the case where the [2R normal big win] occurs (both 2 rounds). Since the common "night image" is displayed as the background image in any game state to which the game is shifted after the end of the big win game, the player can grasp which game state is controlled. It is difficult. Then, when the next big hit does not occur in the 50 times of variable display, if the previous big hit is [2R probability variable big win], the RUSH suggesting production of the success mode is executed in the 50th variable display. , When the previous big win was [2R normal big win], the RUSH suggestive effect of the failure mode is executed in the 50th variation display. According to such a configuration, when [2R probability variable big win] or [2R normal big win] occurs, it is possible to grasp which game state is controlled until the 50th variation display is executed. becomes difficult, and it is possible to prevent the decline in interest when the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is two rounds. In addition, by executing the RUSH suggestion effect at the fiftieth variable display, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state).

(2) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, when it is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit game state), it corresponds to the occurrence of a small hit As an effect to be performed, an example is shown in which the mode when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped differs depending on the effect mode, but not limited to such a form, as an effect corresponding to the occurrence of a small hit, the effect during the small win game (small A winning sound performance, a winning effect performance, an addition performance, etc. when a game ball wins a prize in a special winning hole during a period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the winning game state is open may be changed according to the performance mode.

For example, for the winning sound effect, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game state is open, the effect sound is reproduced and output at the timing when the game ball enters the special winning hole. This is an effect for notifying that the game ball has won a prize. At this time, when the production mode is the cloudy mode, the sound effect A is reproduced and outputted as the sound effect, and when the production mode is the rain mode, the sound effect B is reproduced and outputted as the sound effect, and the production mode is set to the rain mode. In the case of the typhoon mode, the sound effect C may be reproduced and output as the sound effect.

In addition, for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 includes a light guide plate device configured by a light guide plate and a transparent front decorative plate provided in front of the light guide plate, and by allowing light to enter the light guide plate, Alternatively, the front decoration plate may be configured to emit light. For example, the winning effect production is such that when a game ball enters the special winning opening during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game state is open, the light is incident on the light guide plate to decorate the front decorative plate. By making the part emit light, it looks as if the special variable prize winning ball device 17 is emitting light, and it is an effect of notifying that the game ball has entered the special prize winning opening. In such a winning effect performance, the mode of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be varied according to the performance mode by varying the color of the light incident on the light guide plate according to the performance mode. For example, when the presentation mode is the cloudy mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate is white, and when the presentation mode is the rain mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate is blue. is the typhoon mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate may be red.

In FIG. 11-3 (A3) described above, when a game ball enters the special winning hole during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small winning game state is open, " An example of executing an addition effect for displaying an image of "+10" is shown. You may make it change the aspect of this addition production|presentation according to the production|presentation mode. For example, when the production mode is the cloudy mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the production mode is the rain mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device. The image is displayed in the mode of moving from the top of the screen toward the bottom of the screen in 5 (mode related to the "rain image" of the background image), and when the presentation mode is the typhoon mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device. 5 (a mode related to the "typhoon image" of the background image) may be displayed. Also, the aspect (color, typeface, effect, etc.) of the image of "+10" displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed according to the production mode.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, depending on the production mode, depending on the type of decorative pattern, the combination of decorative patterns when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the presence or absence of an effect image when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Although an example in which the patterns are displayed in different ways is shown, the pattern is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns may be displayed in different patterns depending on other production elements.

For example, the speed of the variable display of decorative patterns may be varied according to the production mode. For example, when the production mode is the cloudy mode, the speed of the variable display of the decorative patterns is slow, and when the production mode is the rain mode, the speed of the variable display of the decorative patterns is higher than in the cloudy mode. Faster, when the presentation mode is the typhoon mode, the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be faster than when it is the rain mode. The speed of the variable display of decorative patterns increases in the order of cloudy mode<rain mode<typhoon mode.

Also, for example, the form of the decoration pattern itself that is variably displayed may be changed according to the production mode. For example, when the production mode is the cloudy mode, the variable display of white decorative patterns (designs showing white numbers) is performed, and when the production mode is the rain mode, the blue decorative patterns are displayed. (symbols with blue numbers) are variably displayed, and when the production mode is the typhoon mode, red decorative patterns (symbols with red numbers) are variably displayed. .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to vary the aspect of the variable display of the decoration pattern according to the production mode, and the game state is a high probability state (high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state ), the amusement of the game can be improved.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5 In the above, an example is shown in which the display of the number of consecutive small winning balls is displayed in the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode regardless of which production mode is being controlled. Similarly, regardless of which effect mode is controlled, the small hit consecutive number display may be displayed in a common area of the image display device 5 in a common display mode.

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, (i) the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variable jackpot] controlled to high probability/1KT state after the jackpot ends, and (ii) jackpot end Although an example in which the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variable jackpot] or [2R probability variable jackpot] controlled to the high probability / second KT state later is a common period, it is not limited to such a form, (i) The jackpot ending period shown in (ii) may be different from the jackpot ending period shown in (ii). For example, assuming that the production mode selection period is common (for example, t seconds), in the case of (i), after the production mode selection period ends, control to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Since the effect of displaying the special display 18TM100 showing the characters ``RUSH'' corresponding to the fact that the game is played is not executed, the period from the end of the effect mode selection period to the end of the jackpot ending period is shortened. Also (for example, 10 seconds), in the case of (ii), after the production mode selection period is over, "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Since the effect of displaying the special display 18TM100 showing the characters is executed, the period from the end of the effect mode selection period to the end of the jackpot ending period may be longer than in the case of (i). (eg, 30 seconds). Thus, by differentiating the jackpot ending period [(t+10) seconds] shown in (i) from the jackpot ending period [(t+30) seconds] shown in (ii), an appropriate A performance period may be provided.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the player can select the production mode during the jackpot ending period. The production mode may be selectable by operation, and the production mode may be selectable by the player's operation during the round period (round production period).

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the display information such as the background image can be changed by the operation of the player. The music to be played may be selectable. For example, during the jackpot game state (fanfare production period, round production period, ending production period) when controlled to the small hit RUSH state after the end of the jackpot game state, according to the player's operation, the subsequent small hit RUSH It may be possible to select a piece of music to be played during. Further, even during the small winning RUSH, it may be possible to change the music played during the subsequent small winning RUSH according to the player's operation. In a situation where a small win RUSH is continued for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the music, the game becomes monotonous even during the period in which the advantageous value is given, and the interest is reduced, so that the game is reproduced. Since the music can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small winning RUSH can be eliminated, and the interest in the period during which the advantageous value is given can be further enhanced.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the selection operation of the player is performed within the high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) and the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, After the production mode change effect is executed within the period from the end of the variation period of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol), the next variation display (second 2) before (or at the same time as the start) the actual effect mode (background image) is changed. Here, even in a high probability state (high probability/1st KT state, high probability/2nd KT state), the player selects the production mode during the period when the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. I can't.

(8-1) And, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, in the high probability state (high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state) and within the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, When the selection operation of the player is performed, the production mode name is changed according to the selection operation without changing the actual production mode (background image) before the fluctuation period of the second special symbol ends. has been changed to display the name of the production mode that is scheduled to be changed. At this time, the player may be notified that [the selected effect mode will be controlled from the next variable display]. For example, on the screen in Figure 11-9 (A3), the message "Change to typhoon mode from the next change." On the screen, a message "Change to typhoon mode from the next change." may be displayed on the screen. Then, the next variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is started so that the performance mode change effect is executed within the period until the next variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. The actual effect mode (background image) may be changed before (or at the same time as the start).

(8-2) In addition, unlike the above example, the selection operation of the player is performed in the high probability state (high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) and within the fluctuation period of the second special symbol. In the case, before the end of the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, according to the selection operation (for example, at the timing immediately after the selection operation), the display of the production mode name is changed and the actual production The mode (background image) may also be changed. In such a production configuration, the period in which the display of the production mode name and the actual production mode (background image) can be changed according to the selection operation is, for example, from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative design (start of fluctuation of the second special design). It may be a period until the first decorative design stops (for example, the left decorative design stops in the design display area 5L), and 2 seconds from the start of fluctuation of the decorative design (start of fluctuation of the second special design). It is good also as a period until it passes.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-11, in the high accuracy/second KT state, during the variable display of the second special symbol in which the display result is a small winning symbol, the effect mode change operation is performed. When performed, the background image in the small winning game state is the background image corresponding to the effect mode before the change. That is, the effect mode is not changed in the small win game state (the effect mode before the occurrence of the small win is maintained), and the effect mode is changed after the small win game state ends. Here, even if the second reserved memory number is 0 when the small winning game state is completed (even if the second reserved memory number is 0 when the performance mode change performance is completed), the small winning game state is changed to the selected effect mode. That is, when the second reserved memory number is 0 when the small winning game state is completed (when the second reserved memory number is 0 when the production mode change production is completed), the small winning game Although the background image after the end of the state (the background image after the end of the effect mode change effect) is changed to the background image corresponding to the selected effect mode, the variation of the decoration pattern corresponding to the second special pattern No display is performed.

(10) In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect may be changed according to the effect mode. For example, regarding the execution ratio of the pending change effect that changes the display mode of the pending display (corresponding display corresponding to the variable display that is not executed) based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, the cloudy mode is the highest, and the rain mode is 2. It may be set to be the highest and the typhoon mode to be the lowest. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be changed according to the effect mode. For example, as a setting suggestive effect, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in an open state, and based on the occurrence of the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening or the special winning opening, a small hit is made. In the case of a configuration in which the effect suggesting the winning of a prize and the effect suggesting the display of the number of prize balls can be executed, the execution ratio of these setting suggesting effects is highest in the cloudy mode, second highest in the rain mode, and highest in the typhoon mode. It may be made lower.

Also, the execution ratio may differ for each effect mode according to the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed. For example, regarding the execution ratio of the small hit winning indication effect, the cloudy mode is the highest, the rain mode is the second highest, and the typhoon mode is the lowest. may be highest, rain mode second highest, and cloudy mode lowest.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko game machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10... General winning port 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 13... Sound control board 14... LED control board 15... Relay board 17... Special variable winning ball device 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting Mouth switch 23... First count switch 24... Second count switch 30... Ball-hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Pass gate 100... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

perform variable display,
a game area in which a game medium is shot;
a game state control means for controlling a game state;
production control means for controlling production;
A gaming machine comprising image display means,
The variable display includes a first variable display and a second variable display,
The game area includes a first game area and a second game area,
The game state control means comprises a normal state, an advantageous state advantageous to the player, a special state different from the advantageous state, and a game state controlled after the advantageous state ends, in which the game value increases according to the special state. A special state that is likely to be granted and a predetermined state that is a game state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state and is different from the special state,
In the normal state, shooting game media to the first game area is more advantageous than shooting game media to the second game area,
In the predetermined state and the special state, shooting the game medium to the second game area has a higher advantage than shooting the game medium to the first game area,
the special state is a state in which, of the first variable display and the second variable display, the execution frequency of the second variable display is higher than that in the normal state;
The production control means is
A common background image can be displayed on the image display means when being controlled to the special state and when being controlled to the predetermined state,
When being controlled to the special state, a special display corresponding to the special state can be displayed on the image display means;
The special display can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with a pending display area in which the pending display indicating the number of pending executions of the second variable display is displayed,
The game state control means controls the game state to one of a plurality of game states including the special state and the predetermined state according to the type of the advantageous state ,
The production control means is
In the special state, it is possible to control to any one of a plurality of production modes,
In the special state, the special display can be displayed regardless of the production mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images